Home

H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Operation Manual

Contents

1. Conduit Plate 8 E Number Namba Fig E a Gee ah LS VT130H7U in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm Ibs Ibs and 194 Bottom Top 620K TBD TBD 625K 59 94 1522 25 88 657 14 47 368 57 40 1449 58 75 1492 11 81 300 0 75 19 0 69 18 500 51332 51333 630K TBD TBD Figure 22 Toor ob Eg i HD H 4 Y M xU ty 7 190 Appendix A H7 ASD Operation Manual Figure 23 t t 4 Ss 30 2 J j J sea LLIL LLL LI 3 E 4 3n en Set Co t 3 p epe y spe r A H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix A 191 Figure 24 H te es
2. Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking Enable Disable amp F304 Configuration Over current Stall Level F601 Over voltage Stall Enable Disable F305 Over voltage Stall Level N A Stall Over voltage Stall Level Fast F625 Continuing Stall Period During Positive Torque Speed EA Stall Prevention During Regeneration F453 Start Frequency F250 DC Braking Current F251 DC Injection Braking DC Braking Time F252 Motor Shaft Fixing Control F253 Motor Shaft Stationary Control Enable Disablel F254 Emergency Off Mode Configuration F603 Emergency Off Settings DC Injection Braking Time F604 Emergency Off Activation of the FL Output N A Enable Disable Number of Retries F303 Restart Conditions F301 Scan Rate F312 Retry Restart Configuration Lock on Rate F313 Search Method F314 Search Inertia F315 Ridethrough Mode F302 Ridethrough Time F310 Undervoltage Ridethrough Undervoltage Stall Level F629 Undervoltage Trip Enable Disable F627 Undervoltage Detection Time F628 OL Reduction Starting Frequency F606 Motor 150 OL Time Limit F607 Overload Soft Stall Enable Disable F017 Motor Overload Trip Enable Disable N A V f Motor Enable Disable N A Trip Settings Trip Save at Power Down Enable Disable F602 Cooling Fan Control Cooling Fan Control Mode F620 H7 ASD Operation Manual 39
3. 200 4 Le 3 4 CONDUIT 250 1 5 P CONDUIT K O 2 7 72 Po Conduit Plate 9 50 Number 51313 Top Plate 0 5 CONDUIT K O 1 25 CONDUIT K O o Conduit Plate 2 CONDUIT K O Number 51288 0 00 H 5 45 4 50 4 50 1 25 CONDUIT K O 2 H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix A 193 194 Figure 26 2 CONDUIT K O 1 25 CONDUIT K O 8 1 3 9 62 9 75 Conduit Plate Number 51314 0 00 2 CONDUIT 1 25 CONDUIT K O 3 16 4 97 5 62 1 1 Conduit Plote Number 51328 9 75 Fan 0 00 4 13 KO 2 1 5 CONDUIT 2 2 5 CONDUIT 2 Conduit Plate Number 51333 Top 10 71 3 00 4 00 5 5 6 80 Appendix A 2 CONDUIT K O 1 25 CONDUIT K O 51 6 497 5 62 9 75 8 69 CJ 4 50 Conduit Plote Number 51325 0 00 2 5 CONDUIT K O 2 TUS EO AB g 11 68 Conduit Plate Number 51332 1 5 CONDUIT K O 2 CONDUIT K O 3 Conduit Plate Number 51394 z D 0 00 H7 ASD Operation Manual Conduit Extender Box option The Conduit Extender Box P N ASD Conduit 1 may be used when more room is required at the ASD c
4. MODEL DC BUS LCD NUMBER RESISTOR TRANSISTORS RECT MAINCAPS MOV pcp ay VT130H7U FU2 MS1 FAN1 FAN2 R21 A IGM RECT CAP MOV EOI 2035 00646 49648A N A 2055 00647 50037 N A Reside on the main circuit PCB 2080 50248 49648G 51088 2110 00638 47961 45056 00388 49012 30536 2160 00640 dee 47962 e 46023 45009 2220 N A 49054 2270 00641 47963 m 00388 2 2330 45813 0 47342 2400 642 42338 44362 dd 52095 ios 51501 Parenthesized are the total quantities per model number Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity 2 minimum Table 20 230 Volt 3 0 40 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing MODEL NUMBER PCB Part Numbers 48048 48233 48605 48698 48700 51389 VT130H7U A B C etc PCB Typeform 2035 2055 2080 2110 2160 2220 2270 2330 2400 D E w w gt gt gt gt gt w w w w w w Control Terminal Strip PCB 48570A 4 20 mA PCB 50611A The following items are common to the above listed typeforms Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed H7 ASD Operation Manual Ap
5. i cms B Cx O lo e ees 5 38 4 60 e ol Ed o 9 hg O A E m B Bezel Plate e Front View Side View Back View Figure 33 Screw Length Precaution CAUTION Failure to use the correct hardware may result in damage to the outer surface of the EOI panel and or improper seating of the panel to the bezel plate Use caution when mounting the EOI assembly to ensure that the internal thread clearance is maintained 2 L Correct Incorrect 202 Appendix C H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix D Current Voltage Specifications Table 11 230 Volt NEMA Type 1 Chassis standard ratings table Model Rated Motor Input Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Overload VT130H7U KVA HP Kw 3 Ph 50 60 3 Ph Variable 100 Current 120 for 2 2 Frequency Continuous 60 Secs 2035 3 50 3 00 2 24 10 0A 12 0 A 2055 5 50 5 00 3 73 16 0 A 19 2 A 2080 8 00 7 50 5 60 23 0 A 27 6 A 2110 11 0 10 0 7 46 30 0 A 36 0 A 2160 160 da ex MOS 45 0 A 54 0 A 2220 22 0 20 0 14 9 60 0 A 72 0 A 2270 27 0 25 0 18 6 71 0 A 85 2 A 2330 33 0 30 0 22 4 85 0 A 102 0 A 2400 40 0 40 0 30 0 114 A 136 8 A Table 12 460 Volt NEMA Type 1 Chassis standard ratings table Model Rated Motor Input Vo
6. Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action Display ATN Autotuning This code is displayed during Autotuning Clr Clear This code is displayed when the Stop key is pressed after a trip DB or DC Braking This code conveys the DC DBON Indicator Injection function being carried out The display shows DB when braking and shows DBON when the motor shaft stationary function is being carried out E 10 Sink Source This fault results if there is Sink Source jumper of the Ensure that the Sink Switching Error an improperly positioned control board is in the Source jumper of the Sink Source jumper on the wrong position control board of the ASD control board or on an Sink Source configuration in the correct position option device of an option device is Ensure that the switch incorrect settings configuration and the connections to the option devices are correct and secured E 12 Encoder Error This fault is the result of an Disconnection at the Ensure that the encoder ASD that is configured to Encoder circuit connections are correct receive a signal from a Motor is stopped and is and secured shaft mounted encoder and generating torque via torque Ensure that the PG no signal is being received limit control settings are correct for the while running ASD is not configured application Program properly Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings H7 ASD Operation Manual 179 EOI Display E 13
7. 51 CNAUX AUX PEBE d z CC p XC T NU TBe CC RY STI 6 H7 ASD Operation Manual The ASD input voltage should remain within 10 of the specified input voltage range Input voltages approaching the upper or lower limit settings may require that the overvoltage and undervoltage stall protection level parameters F626 and F629 be adjusted Voltages outside of the permissible tolerance should be avoided The input power frequency should be 2 Hz of the specified input frequency Do not use an ASD with a motor that has a power rating that is higher than the rated output of the ASD The ASD is designed to operate NEMA B motors Consult with your sales representative before using the ASD for special applications such as with an explosion proof motor or applications with a piston load Do Not apply commercial power to the output terminals T1 U T2 V or T3 W Disconnect the ASD from the motor before megging or applying a bypass voltage to the motor Interface problems may occur when this ASD is used in conjunction with some types of process controllers Signal isolation may be required to prevent controller and or ASD malfunction contact your Toshiba sales representative or the process controller manufacturer for additional information about compatibility and signal isolation Use caution when setting the output frequency Over speeding a motor decreases its ability to deliver torque and may result in damage to the motor an
8. the communications input signal value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 frequency F811 Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 frequency F814 and the communications input signal value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 frequency F813 Once set as the input signal value changes the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 frequency This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the Communications Reference input value range Direct Access Number F811 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units FBi3 Setpoint 2 Col Setpoint 1 Col F811 0 0 Hz F812 Setpoint 1 Hz Output Frequency F8l4 Setpoint 2 Hz gt Communications Speed Setpoint 1 frequency Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input See F811 for further information on this setting This parameter sets Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 170 Direct Access Number F812 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeabl
9. 1 miexe e P 1 l 1 1 1 8 2759 l 1 1 1 0 500 cet 9 i sS 378 5 n 85 Qu x 5 80 1 4 20 PEM NUT 4 10 32 PEM NUT 4 0 000 zx zz je 0 375 0 45 X 0 11 4 gt o R0 18 amp 28 ed 5 250 1 4 750 Me B 3 993 0 37 2 gt H 0 991 e 4 259 H 1 897 e 0 500 on o o u e AN ES D o5 5 g ae 198 Appendix B H7 ASD Operation Manual Figure 30 51769 and 51770 adapter mounting plate dimensions a 8 c e d i d 06702 a 0 S48 61 B I e brun G2ovg amp 0c4 2 o Q 3 Sal v e p ai d 0 1 90te Bd 4 Er 2 gi ia S vO 1 6 4 1 66 9 l w e 9 550 ZIE0 00 0 000 0 A 5 80 Qo vt E s _ fiL ooo pom 2 A u M On NON e oo eo XR x ne 26 d oo NU st oo 2 8 MN CES o Ii Kx qe SS SS SS w SS 199 Appendix B
10. 25 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual 139 F507 F511 S Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special Sets the upper limit frequency of S pattern 1 and 2 Direct Access Number F507 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 25 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units Accel Decel Lower Limit Time Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the lower limit of the Accel Decel time Direct Access Number F508 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Accel 3 Time Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 3 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F510 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1
11. F502 Program gt Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Linear This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 1 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 The figures below provide a profile of the available accel decel patterns Max Freq Changeable During Run Yes 22 Linear acceleration and deceleration is the default pattern and is used on most Freq applications ji 0 Linear Acceleration Deceleration Mox Freq FH S pattern 1 is used for applications that Frea Setting require quick acceleration and deceleration This setting is also popular for applications that Frea require shock absorption at the start of acceleration or deceleration Mox Freq Effective Acceleration Tine Time sec S Pattern Acceleration Deceleration 1 FH Freq Setting S pattern 2 acceleration and deceleration Bose decreases the rate of change above the base Prea frequency Freq HZ gt lm Effective Acceleration Tine m Time sec S Pottern Acceleration Deceleration 2 138 H7 ASD Operation Manual F503 F506 Accel Decel Pattern 2 Direct Access Number F503 Program Special Control Parameters 1 4 Settings Parameter T
12. No Group 3 Speed 6 Direct Access Number F556 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 6 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 7 Direct Access Number F557 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 7 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 8 Direct Access Number F558 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 8 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed Repeat Factor Direct Access Number F560 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Factory Default 1 Group 4 will be run 1 254 or Infinite Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 1 Direct Access Number F561 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 9 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 2 Direct Access Number F562 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual 147
13. Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F804 F806 RS485 Communications Time Out Action Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by determining the action to be taken in the event of a time out Time Out Action The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the drive Settings No Action Alarm Trip Direct Access Number F804 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Trip Changeable During Run Yes Communication Interval Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Settings This parameter sets the Common Serial response delay time Direct Access Number F805 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 00 Units Seconds TTL Master Output Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Settings In a master follower configuration this setting determines the output parameter of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs Note Select No Slave if F826 is configured as a Master Output controller Otherwise an
14. Program Menu Navigation A Parameter Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name aramete Number Protection Parameters Cumulative Run Timer Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting F621 Phase Loss Output Phase Loss Detection Enable Disable F605 Low Current Settings Low Current Trip Alarm Configuration F610 Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time F622 Abnormal Speed Settings Overspeed Detection Frequency Range F623 Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range F624 Short Circuit Pulse Run Command F613 Short Circuit Detect Pulse Short Circuit Pulse Run Duration F614 Overtorque Trip Enable Disable F615 Overtorque Trip Alarm Level During Power F616 Operation Overtorque Settings Overtorque Trip Alarm Level During F617 Regeneration Overtorque Detection Time F618 Braking Trouble Internal Timer F630 Brake Fault Timer Release After Run Timer F632 Supply Voltage Compensation Enable Disable Base Frequency Voltage F307 Output Voltage Limitation Enable Disable Suppression of Inrush Current Timing Soft Start F609 Interlock with ST Torque Setting Parameters VIAL F205 RR F214 Set Points RX F220 RX2 F226 BIN F232 Torque Command Selection F420 Torque Command Filter F421 Torque Control Synchronized Torque Bias Input Selection F422 Tension Torque Bias Input Selection F423 Load Sharing Gain Input Selection F424 Positive Torque Limit 1Selection F440
15. 6 G 192 Appendix A H7 ASD Operation Manual Conduit Plate Information The conduit plate information provided below is for the 0 75 to 350 HP H7 ASDs of the 230 460 and 600 volt product lines Each bottom or top conduit plate may be cross referenced to the applicable device using the information in Table 10 on page 188 Note Unless otherwise specified all dimensions are in inches Figure 25 5 90 1 65 2 15 2 15 4 08 1 80 2 00 2 00 gg il conpurr om pang KO 4 e o w 1 CONDUT 7 1 50 KO 3 ac 1 3 i 0 5 CONDUIT K 0 4 5 VA EN J E Conduit Plate 0 5 CONDUIT KNOCKOUT Side View GU AUR BICI Number 49032 7 71 Nus 49033 s on q ANU ee ae o 2 353 1 51 1531 2 50 3 25 3 00 1 0 88 HOLE Ee w PLUG 3 1 25 0 5 CONDUIT K 0 CONDUIT K 0 3 f 9 P LL o Conduit Sat Conduit Plate Ages Number 49462 Number 50097 e X 4 35 29 5 06 5 44 4 50
16. 600 0 Units kW Ridethrough Time Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage this parameter determines the length of the Ridethrough time During a Ridethrough regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings it is not used to drive the motor The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this parameter Note The actual Ridethrough Time is load dependent Direct Access Number F310 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Seconds Disable Forward Run Disable Reverse Run Program Frequency Setting Parameters Forward Reverse Disable This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode If either direction is disabled commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized If both directions are disabled the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F311 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 111 F312 F315 Scan Rate Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage the output signal of the drive will cease Upon restoration of power the drive will output a low level signal that will be used to determi
17. Connect the input terminal that was configured in step 1 to CC and the Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed Open the connection to stop the Pattern Run before its conclusion See F018 on pg 55 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F520 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disable Changeable During Run No Pattern Run Mode Restart Command Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Pattern Run This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming Settings Reset Continue H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F521 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disable Changeable During Run No 143 F530 F535 Group 1 Speed Repeat Factor Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds This parameter sets the number of times that the pattern defined in Group 1 will be run Direct Access Number F530 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum Infinite Group 1 Speed 1 Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Up to four groups of Preset Speeds may be setup and run from this screen The Preset Speed numbers 1 15 may be entered into the Speed field to be run for the number of times entered into the Repeat fie
18. Setpoint 2 CO Setpoint 1 CO G7 Output Frequency Fees Fee3 Setpoint 1 HZ gt Setpoint 2 HZ gt Torque Settings Fee4 Setpoint 2 CO G7 Output Torque Fee6 Fee Setpoint 1 torque Setpoint 2 torque H7 ASD Operation Manual F223 F226 RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F222 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F222 Direct Access Number F223 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode See F222 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the RX2 input level that represents RX2 Reference Setpoint 2 frequency direction torque frequency This value is enter
19. Changeable During Run No ST Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment ST This parameter selects the functionality of the ST input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F113 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Standby Changeable During Run No RES Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment RES This parameter selects the functionality of the RES input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 62 Direct Access Number F114 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reset Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F115 F118 S1 Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment S1 This parameter selects the functionality of the S1 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible f
20. F563 F570 Group 4 Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F563 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 11 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 4 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F564 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 12 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 5 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F565 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 13 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 6 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F566 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 14 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F567 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 15 Changeable During Run No Group 4 Speed 8 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F568 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Patt
21. Function Speed Error Description This fault is the result of a Possible Causes Improper encoder Corrective Action Ensure that the encoder Over Speed motor speed that is greater connection or setup connections are correct than the commanded speed information and secured when using an encoder e Defective encoder Ensure that the PG speed control settings are correct for the application Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings Replace the encoder E 17 Key Error This fault is caused by an Defective EOI Replace the EOI improper response from the EOI E 1 or E2 Panel Overflow This fault is displayed in the The displayed number has Indicator LED event that the value shown more characters than that display only is comprised of more digits which will fit the LED than that which can be display displayed on the LED display EEP1 EEPROM Error This fault is caused by an An EEPROM write error Reset the ASD and retry EEPROM write error Defective EEPROM Make a service call if the failure persists EEP2 Initial Read Error This fault is caused by an An EEPROM read error Reset the ASD and retry EEPROM read error Defective EEPROM Make a service call if the Defective EEPROM failure persists EEP3 Initial Read Error This fault is caused by An EEPROM data error Reset the ASD and retry corrupted firmware
22. H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix C 200 EOI Remote Mounting The H7 ASD may be controlled from a remote position via the EOI For safety and application specific reasons some ASD installations will warrant that the operator not be in the vicinity during operation or that the EOI not be attached to the ASD housing The EOI may be mounted either with or without the optional H7 Remote Mounting Kit P N ASD MTG KIT The ease of installation is enhanced by the H7 Remote Mounting Kit which allows for easier cable routing and EOI placement The EOI may be mounted up to 15 feet away from the ASD and will provide the full range of functions that are available if the EOI were ASD mounted Remote mounting will also allow for multiple EOI mountings at one location or one EOI may be switched between multiple ASDs Controlling and monitoring several ASDs via an EOI may be accomplished from a central location The optional dust cover P N ASD BPC may be used to cover the front panel opening of the ASD housing after removing the EOI An EOI extender cable is required for remote mounting EOI extender cables are available in lengths of 7 10 or 15 feet and may be ordered through your sales representative Remote EOI Required Hardware EOI Mounting Hardware e 6 32 x 5 16 Pan Head Screw P N 50595 4 ea 6 Split Lock Washer P N 01884 4 ea 6 Flat Washer P N 01885 4 ea Bezel Plate Mounting Hardware e Bezel Plate P
23. LocallRemote Key 23 Lockout 35 Low Current Settings 40 Low Current Trip 156 Low Current Trip Threshold 157 Low Current Trip Threshold Time 157 Low Speed Operation 19 Low Speed Signal Output Frequency 57 Lower Limit Frequency 27 52 H7 Operation Manual Maintenance Precautions 4 Manual Torque Limits 41 Manual s Purpose and Scope Maximum Frequency 52 Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters 44 Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency 86 MON PRG 24 Monitor Mode 32 Monitor Setup 45 MOP acceleration rate 68 MOP deceleration rate 68 Motor 1 Base Frequency 53 Motor 1 Max Output Voltage 110 Motor 1 Torque Boost 54 Motor 2 Base Frequency 77 Motor 2 Max Output Voltage 77 Motor 2 Torque Boost 77 Motor 3 Base Frequency 78 Motor 3 Max Output Voltage 78 Motor 3 Torque Boost 78 Motor 4 Base Frequency 79 Motor 4 Max Output Voltage 79 Motor 4 Torque Boost 79 Motor 150 OL Time Limit 156 Motor Braking 21 Motor Capacity 124 Motor Characteristics 19 Motor connection diagram 9 Motor Constant 1 primary resistance 123 Motor Constant 2 secondary resistance 123 Motor Constant 3 exciting inductance 123 Motor Constant 4 load inertia 123 Motor Constant 5 leakage inductance 123 Motor Current Rating 28 Motor Overload Trip 39 Motor Parameters 44 45 Motor Set 1 34 44 Motor Set 2 44 Motor Set 3 44 Motor Set 4 45 Motor Settings 44 Motor Shaft Fix
24. Numerical Setpoints VIII Factory Default 100 0 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminals when either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Changeable During Run Yes Control or the Torque Control mode Minimum 0 0 See F201 for further information on this setting Maximum 100 0 This parameter sets the VI II input level that represents Reference Setpoint 2 torque or frequency This value is entered as 0 100 of the VI II input Units 96 signal range VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency Direct Access Number F204 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Parameter Type Numerical Setpoints VIII Factory Default 80 0 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminals when either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Changeable During Run Yes Control mode Minimum 0 0 See F201 for further information on this setting Maximum Max Freq F011 This parameter sets VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F203 Units Hz Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Direct Access Number F205 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints gt VIM Parameter Type Numerical This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminals when Factory Default 0 0
25. Position Loop Gain Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter provides a divisor for the pulse input when operating in the Pulse Control mode Forward Position Pulse 1 Q Control 6 2 C Reverse Pulse Encoder Feedback 118 Direct Access Number F371 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 4 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 H7 ASD Operation Manual F372 F376 Position Completion Range Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings During a deceleration ramp this parameter sets a speed range that must be attained before the Stop command may be executed Direct Access Number F372 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 4000 Frequency Limit at Position Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings While operating in the Position Control mode and using PG feedback this setting determines the maximum acceleration rate in Hz second Direct Access Number F373 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 800 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 8001 Units Hz Second Current Control Proportional Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt PG Settings This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output current to control speed The larger
26. Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 14 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1110 and is identified as Preset Speed 14 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F293 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 15 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 15 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1111 and is identified as Preset Speed 15 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter 108 Direct Access Number F294 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F300 F303 PWM Carrier Frequency Program Special Control Parameters Carrier Frequency This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied to the output waveform Note For proper operation the carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes Direct Access Number
27. Units Hz RR Speed Reference Setpoint 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode See F210 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the RR input level that represents RR Reference Setpoint 2 frequency torque or frequency This value is entered as 0 100 of the 0 10 VDC RR input signal range Direct Access Number F212 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RR Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F210 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RR Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F212 Direct Access Number F213 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Hz RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints R
28. 182 H7 ASD Operation Manual EOI of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during a fixed speed run or if during a fixed speed run the ASD overheats On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA on a fixed speed run elevated temperature i Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action Display 1 Overcurrent This fault occurs when the Phase to phase short U V Ensure that the output of Accel ASD current exceeds 34096 or W the ASD is connected to of the rated FLA on ASDs Accel time too short the motor correctly that are 100 HP OF less Voltage Boost setting is too Increase the Accel time during acceleration On high Decrease the Voltage ADR hatare greater than y Motor machine jammed Boost setting 100 HP this fault occurs when the ASD current e Mechanical brake engaged Ensure that the system is exceeds 320 of the rated while the ASD is running not jammed FLA during acceleration The ASD is starting intoa Ensure that the brake is rotating motor not engaged The contactor between the motor and the ASD should be configured such that the contactor changes state only when the ASD is outputting 0 0 Hz and or the motor is at zero RPM 2 Overcurrent This fault occurs when the Phase to phase short U V Ensure that the output of Decel ASD current exceeds 340 or W the ASD is co
29. 32 Load Torque 50 H7 ASD Operation Manual F007 F009 Type Reset Program Utility Parameters Type Reset This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by allowing a quick system setup change when required Performing a Type Reset results in one of the following user selected post reset configurations Settings Auto Setup for 50 Hz Auto Setup for 60 Hz Restore Factory Defaults Clear Trip Clear Run Timer New Base Drive Board Save User Parameters Restore User Parameters Reload EOI Flash Reset EOI Memory Direct Access Number F007 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Changeable During Run No Direction of motor rotation No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter sets the direction of motor rotation This setting may be changed during operation This setting will not override parameter F311 Forward Reverse Disable If either direction is disabled via parameter F311 the disabled direction will not be recognized if commanded by the LED Keypad If both directions are disabled via parameter F311 the direction command from the LED Keypad will determine the direction of the motor rotation Note If using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Direct Access Number F008 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable D
30. 46 Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range 159 Speed Limit torque Reference 127 Speed Limit Torque Level 128 Speed Limit Torque Range 128 Speed Limit Torque Recovery 128 Speed Loop Integral Gain 120 Speed Loop Proportional Gain 119 Speed Reach Frequency 57 Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance 58 Speed Ref Setpoint 38 Speeds 42 ST 11 12 ST Input Terminal Assignment 62 ST Input Terminal Delay 73 ST Signal Selection 59 ST1 6 Stall 39 Standard Mode Settings 34 Startup and Test 10 Startup Frequency 100 222 Startup Wizard 34 Startup Wizard Requirements 27 Status LED 23 Stop Key 23 Stop Pattern 167 Storage 5 SWI 14 SW2 14 Synchronized Torque Bias Input 125 System Grounding 8 System Operation 25 System Status Indicators 179 T T1 U 9 T2 V 9 T3 W 9 Tension 125 Tension Torque Bias Input 125 Terminal Descriptions 12 Terminal Selection Parameters 36 Torque Boost Adjustment 162 Torque Command 124 Torque Command Filter 125 Torque Command Mode 127 Torque Control 40 Torque Limit Group 167 Torque Limit Settings 40 Torque Setting Parameters 40 Torque Speed Limiting 41 Trip History 45 177 Trip Monitor From ASD 178 Trip Monitor from ASD 45 Trip Record at Monitor Screen 178 Trip Save at Power Down Enable 155 Trip Settings 39 Trips 177 Trouble Shooting 177 Troubleshooting 179 TTL Master Output 169 Type Reset 35 51 U Undervoltage Detec
31. Accel 3 Time 140 Accel 4 Time 141 Accel Decel 1 4 Settings 45 Accel Decel 1 Settings 34 Accel Decel Lower Limit Time 140 Accel Decel Pattern 1 138 Accel Decel Pattern 2 139 Accel Decel Pattern 3 141 Accel Decel Pattern 4 142 Accel Decel Special 45 Accel Decel Special Display Resolution 166 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 2 141 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 3 142 Acceleration 51 Acceleration Time Adjustment 162 Adjust Accel Decel Automatically 28 Alarm Popups 35 Allow Autotune 124 AM 11 13 44 AM Terminal Adjustment 164 AM Terminal Assignment 164 AM FM FP and Analog 1 amp 2 settings 50 Analog 164 Analog Terminal Adjustment 164 Analog Terminal Setting 164 Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment 165 Analog 2 Terminal Setting 164 Analog Filter 38 Analog Input Filter 87 Analog Input Functions 36 37 Analogl 44 Analog2 44 Appendix A 188 Appendix B 196 Appendix C 200 Appendix D 203 216 Appendix E 205 Appendix F 208 Appendix G 210 Appendix H 211 ASD Multicom Option Boards 210 ASD Number 168 ASD7 SIM2 210 ASD BPC 210 ASD CAB PC 210 ASD EOI N4 210 ASD ISO 1 210 ASD MTG KIT 210 ASD side Switching Wait Time 115 ASD SS 210 ASD TBI ACI 210 At Frequency Powerline Switching 115 At trip Recorded Parameters 178 Automatic Accel Decel 1 48 Autotuning 19 B Backlash Setup 46 Base Frequency Volts 40 Bezel Mounting Dime
32. Adjustable Speed Drive Inspection nennen 5 EE 5 Disposal oto eibi tt DID deel Sie ihe BH 5 Installation and Connections ccsssssssscssssssssccsssssssccscessccecesessccececssssssccscssssssscscssssssesscees 6 Installation NOLte s ERE e tt E t o GNE VE s 6 Mounting the ASD indiget etie Ue Ee 8 Connecting the ASD oriei esset etie 8 System Grounding tite etel pes rere ru deer eden 8 PoweriGonnectolns i odit tss ales ca te tete ttv ER 9 Lead Length Specificatiofis 5 ter ete ter pb t pb ee pe 10 Starttip and Test P DOSE 10 T O anid Control 5 ui Sere eet aedium ute aee 11 Terminal Descriptions 7o tte D vedas cae ceca ne eese atn 12 CON PRIN OU icti ete ertet iere tte mee moe eec 15 CNUI 1A and CNU2 2A Pinout prennon E R 16 I O Circuit Configurations SOR BU Peg te dto 17 Typical Connection Diagram E R R 18 Motor Characteristics eon na cereo gere er casos eee e seine c cosavsecdssssbeseodseesdevesdscestace 19 esis EU DT Hee E sete 19 Pulse Width Modulation Operation eese nnen nentes 19 LOW Speed Operation cocto PRECOR DAD E eR ERU 19 Overload Protection Adjustment 19 Operation Above 60 Hz ete re
33. Displays the H7 Output Frequency Frequency Reference Displays the Frequency Setpoint Output Current Displays the Output Current as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 Bus Voltage Displays the Bus Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 Output Voltage Displays the Output Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 Input Signal Status Displays the status of the discrete input lines of the Control Terminal Strip Out1 Out2 FL Displays the status of the discrete output lines of the Control Terminal Strip Timer Displays the Cumulative Run Time in hours Postcomp Frequency Displays the Output Frequency after the application of the slip compensation correction value Feedback inst Provides a status of the Real Time Feedback in Hz Feedback 1 second Provides a status of the 1 Second Averaging feedback in Hz Torque Displays the Output Torque as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 Torque Reference Displays the Torque Reference as a percentage Torque Current Displays the current being used to produce torque Excitation Current Displays the current required to produce the excitation field PID Value Displays the PID feedback value in Hz Proportional Integral Derivative Motor Overload Displays the Motor Overload value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor ASD Overload Displays the ASD Overload as a percentage of
34. Function Overheat Description This fault is caused by the an excessive ambient temperature as detected by the internal thermistor Possible Causes Cooling fan inoperative Cooling fan vent is closed or obstructed Ambient temperature is too high may be too close to heat generating equipment ASD is operating at an elevated temperature Internal thermistor is disconnected Corrective Action Replace the cooling fan Ensure that there is no heat producing equipment around the ASD Ensure that the ASD is adequately ventilated see Mounting the ASD on pg 8 Allow the system to cool and retry Make a service call OL1 ASD Overload This fault occurs when the An excessive load Reduce the load maximum output of the Too rapid of an Lengthen the acceleration ASD is insufficient for the acceleration time load requirements DC damping rate is settoo Decrease the damping high rate The motor is starting intoa Ensure that the ASD is load after a momentary properly matched to the power failure application The ASD is improperly Lower the carrier matched to the application frequency Carrier frequency is set too high OL 2 Motor This fault is caused by V f parameter improperly Ensure that the V f Overloaded having an excessive load set parameter is properly set placed on the motor Motor is locked Ensure that the motor is Continuous operation at low not locked spee
35. Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Set The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command inputs for the ASD Command inputs include Run Stop Forward etc The Control Terminal Strip selection enables the LocallRemote key to switch the controlling input of the ASD between the Control Terminal Strip and the EOL The EOI selection places the system in the Local mode and receives commands from the EOI only The RS232 485 selection enables the LocallRemote key to switch the controlling input of the ASD between the RS232 485 line and the EOI Settings Use Control Terminal Strip Use LED Keypad Option Use Common Serial TTL Use RS232 485 Use Communication Card 48 Direct Access Number F003 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Use Control Terminal Strip Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F004 F006 Frequency Mode 1 Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Set Frequency Mode 1 determines the source of the frequency command or the torque command when operating in the torque control mode for the ASD If the Use EOI or Use LED Keypad Option is selected the Local Remote key is enabled to select either the EOI LED Keypad local or the Control Terminal Strip remote as the command source Settings Use Use RR Use RX Use Option Card RX2 Use LED Keypad Option Use Binary BCD Input Use Common Serial TTL Use RS232 48
36. Reference Priority Selection Factory Default Frequency Source 1 Either Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 may control the output frequency of the ASD This parameter determines which of the two will control the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from one to the other Changeable During Run Yes Frequency Source 1 Settings Frequency Source 2 Frequency Source 1 Frequency Source 2 Frequency Source 1 Priority Frequency Source 2 Priority Time Frequency Source Priority Switching the commanded frequency exceeds the F208 level parameter 200 s setting determines if the F208 N Frequency The settings of Frequency Source 1 or 2 specifies the input source for the 1 or the 2 frequency command E Y source controls the output frequency command signal these settings are performed in F004 and F207 frequency respectively If Frequency Source 1 is selected here the ASD will follow the settings of F004 If Frequency Source 2 is selected here the ASD will follow the settings of F207 The Frequency Source 1 Priority and Frequency Source 2 Priority selections are used in conjunction with the Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency setting F208 Parameter F208 establishes a threshold frequency that will be used as a reference when determining when to switch output control between Frequency Mode 1 and Frequency Mode 2 If Frequency Source
37. Settings 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Direct Access Number F820 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 9600 Changeable During Run Yes RS485 Wire Count Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Settings This parameter sets the communications protocol to the 2 or 4 wire method Settings 2 wire 4 wire H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F821 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run Yes 171 F825 F832 RS485 Response Delay Time Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS232 485 response delay time Direct Access Number F825 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 00 Units Seconds RS485 Master Output Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings In a master follower configuration this setting determines the output parameter of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs Select No Slave if F806 is configured as a Master Output controller Otherwise an EOI failure will result Settings No Slave normal operation Frequency Reference Output Command Frequency Torque Command Output Torque Command Direct Access Number F826 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default No Sla
38. TIC shall not be liable for technical editorial omissions or mistakes in this manual nor shall it be liable for special incidental indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of information contained in this manual This manual is copyrighted No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation Copyright 2003 Toshiba International Corporation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Please complete the Warranty Card supplied with the ASD and return it to Toshiba by prepaid mail This will activate the 12 month warranty from the date of installation but shall not exceed 18 months from the date of purchase Complete the following information about the drive and retain it for your records H7 Model Number H7 Serial Number Project Number if applicable Date of Installation Inspected By Name of Application Important Notice This user manual may not cover all of the variations of ASD applications nor may it provide information on every possible contingency concerning installation programming operation or maintenance The contents of this user manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior agreement commitment or relationship between the customer and Toshiba International Corporation The sales contract contains the ent
39. also called Load Share is used to share the load among Maximum 100 0 two or more mechanically coupled motors Unlike Stall which reduces the UE Units output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches a preset level Drooping can decrease or increase the V f setting of a motor to maintain a balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors Because of variances in gearboxes sheaves belts motors and since the speed of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system one motor may experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down thus shedding load and encouraging a lightly loaded motor to pick up the slack The goal of Drooping Control is to have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled motors Speed at Drooping Gain 0 Direct Access Number F321 Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0 output torque gain while Factory Default 60 00 operating in the Drooping Control mode This function determines the lowest speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Hz Speed at Drooping Gain 10096 Direct Access Number F322 Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets
40. e Defective EEPROM Make a service call if the inability to read the failure persists firmware EF1 or Ground Fault Trip This fault occurs when the Ground fault at the motor Ensure that the ground EF2 amount of current that Ground fault at the output connections are correct enters the ASD at the R S of the ASD and secured and T leads is different from Current leakage to Earth Ensure that CC is not the current leaving on the Ground connected to Earth return line Ground Disconnect the output of the ASD from the motor and meggar the motor EMG Emergency Off This code is displayed when StoplReset key was pressed Reset the ASD the ASD is stopped via the twice at the EOI EOFF command using The EOFF command was either the StopIReset key or received remotely is input remotely EPHI Input Line Loss This fault occurs when one Input power line is not Ensure that the input or more of the input power secured to the input terminal power lines are connected lines to the ASD are of the ASD securely and of the proper inactive or missing AnR S or T fuse is open voltage levels blown Ensure that the input power fuses are intact 180 H7 ASD Operation Manual EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action EPH O Output Line Loss This fault occurs when one Output power line from the Ensure that the motor or more of the output power
41. 1 1 Torque Boost F016 1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600 2 Base Frequency F170 2 Max Output Voltage F171 Motor Set 2 2 Torque Boost F172 2 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F173 3 Base Frequency F174 Motor Set 3 3 Max Output Voltage F175 44 H7 ASD Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number Motor Parameters 3 Torque Boost F176 Motor Set 3 3 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F177 4 Base Frequency F178 4 Max Output Voltage F179 Motor Set 4 4 Torque Boost F180 4 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F181 Monitor Setup Trip History Trip History Records N A Most Recent N A Second Most Recent N A Trip Monitor from ASD Third Most Recent N A Fourth Most Recent N A Scrolling Monitor Select Scrolling Monitor Select N A Special Control Parameters Start Frequency F240 End Frequency F243 Frequency Control Run Frequency F241 Run Frequency Hysteresis F242 Jump Frequency Bandwidth Settings F271 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency Processing Selection F276 Carrier Frequency PWM Carrier Frequency Setting F300 Accel Decel Pattern 1 Configuration F009 Accel Decel 1 4 Accel Decel Pattern 2 Configuration F500 Settings Accel Decel Pattern 3 Configuration F510 Accel Decel Pattern 4 Configuration F514 S Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment
42. 1 Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection Use Control Terminal Strip 2 Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminals gt S1 set to Preset Speed Command 1 Repeat for S2 S4 as Preset Speed Command 2 4 respectively all Normally Open Note The default setting of S4 is EOff but this terminal may be re assigned as the MSB 3 Program gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Preset Speeds 1 press Enter twice and set an output frequency as Preset Speed 1 repeat for Preset Speeds 2 15 as required 4 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Preset Speed Mode Use Speed Modes Enable Disable When Enabled the direction accel decel and torque settings of the Preset Speed being run are used When Disabled only the speed setting of the Preset Speed being run is used 5 Place the system in the Remote mode LocallRemote LED Off 6 Provide a Run command connect F and or R to CC Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed 1 S1 to CC 0001 binary With S1 S4 configured to output Preset Speeds F115 F118 0001 1111 may be applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to run the associated Preset Speed If bidirectional operation is required F and R must be connected to CC and Use Preset Speeds must be enabled at F380 With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count the S1 S4 settings will produce the programmed speed settings as indic
43. 236 49462 N A 4110 13 15 4160 43 50 ao 22 45 52 4270 46 53 14 22 361 12 16 309 11 23 285 14 22 361 13 05 331 11 46 291 0 55 14 0 28 7 49033 N A 4330 47 54 4400 51 58 4500 TBD 4600 TBD 4750A 24 63 625 17 5 445 12 81 325 22 33 567 23 75 603 14 25 362 0 75 19 0 38 10 410KA 90 121 50097 N A 23 412KA 26 471672 415KA 38 63 981 17 5 445 13 78 350 36 35 923 37 75 959 12 63 321 0 75 19 0 63 16 TBD 49900 49468 420KA 425KA 430KA 24 50 00 1270 24 15 613 20 00 508 46 15 1172 48 50 1232 12 00 305 0 75 19 0 69 18 TBD 54086 54086 435KA 6015 6025 6035 6060 22 8 47215 728 185 7 33 186 847 215 795202 6 74 171 0 5313 023 6 11 1 49462 6080 6120 6160 6220 73 104 6270 23 63 600 17 38 441111 50 292 21 63 549 22 75 578 14 25 362 0 75 19 0 50 13 51394 N A 6330 80 111 6400 125 178 6500 23 6600 36 50 927 19 25 489 13 56 344 33 88 861 35 34 898 12 63 321 0 75 19 0 63 16 127 180 51288 N A 6750 149 200 610K 612K 57 00 1448 19 25 489 13 16 334 54 16 1376 55 81 141812 63 321 0 75 19 0 69 18 221 295 51314 51313 615K H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix A 189 Table 10 Continued
44. 6 on pg 67 Input 14 Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F124 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment 14 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the 14 input terminal Changeable During Run No Note The S14 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S14 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 14 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 H7 ASD Operation Manual 65 F125 F126 Input 15 Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F125 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment 15 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the 15 input terminal l Changeable During Run No Note The S15 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S15 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition th
45. 615K 225 2 0 620K 300 3 0 625K 400 3 0 Note Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix E 207 Appendix F 208 Link Reactor Information Selection of a link reactor DCL is often application specific This document will provide guidelines for selecting link reactors for the H7 series of drives The 600 Volt series drives above 15 HP allow for the reactor to be mounted internal to the drive All other H7 drives require that the DCL be mounted externally When selecting and mounting an external DCL the air flow around the reactor the thermal capability of the reactor the allowable voltage loss and the amount of harmonic reduction required will be considerations Table 17 DCL Selection Table Model Number DCL Part DCL Inductance DCL VT130H7U Number mH Amps 2080 36350 0 40 30 0 2110 36351 0 30 38 0 2160 36376 0 20 57 0 2220 36353 0 20 76 0 2270 36355 0 10 114 4110 36358 1 30 20 0 4160 36359 0 90 29 0 4220 36360 0 70 39 0 4270 36361 0 50 50 0 4330 36363 0 40 75 0 4400 36364 0 30 88 0 4500 36365 0 20 114 4600 36365 0 20 114 4750A 36366 0 20 141 410KA 42769 0 14 205 6060 36356 2 50 11 0 6120 36359 0 90 29 0 6160 36359 0 90 29 0 6220 36360 0 70 39 0 6270 36362 0 50 55 0 6330 36361 0 50 50 0 6400 36363 0 40 75 0 6500 36363 0 40 75 0 6600 36364 0 30 88 0
46. 6270 27 0 25 0 18 6 27 0 32 4 A 6330 33 0 30 0 22 4 32 0 A 38 4 A 6400 40 0 40 0 30 0 Input Voltage Level 41 0 49 2 6500 50 0 50 0 37 0 52 0 62 4 6600 60 0 60 0 45 0 62 0 74 4 6750 75 0 75 0 55 0 7 77 0 92 4 610 610K 100 100 75 0 99 0A 118 8 A 612K 125 125 90 0 125 0 A 150 0 A 615K 150 150 110 150 0 A 180 0 A 620K 200 200 150 200 0 A 240 0 A 625K 250 250 185 250 0 A 300 0 A 630K 300 300 220 300 0 A 360 0 A 204 Appendix D H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix E Cable Terminal Specifications Note The following ratings are guidelines and shall not be the sole determining factor of the lug or wire size used with the ASD Application specific applicables wire insulation type conductor material and local and regional regulations are but a few of the considerations when selecting the actual lug and wire type to be used with the ASD Table 14 230 Volt Drive Cable Terminal Specifications Circuit Typical Wire Cable Size AWG Lug Size Model Breaker VT130H7U Rating Input Output AM FM and II Control Terminal ASD Input Output Power Amps Power Terminals Strip Lug Wire Capacity 2010 15 14 2015 15 14 2025 15 14 2035 20 14 8 to 24 AWG 2055 30 14 20 18 ew 2 um 3 core shield 2 core shield 2110 70 8 2160 90 6 2220 100 4 2270 125 4 14 1 0 2330 150 3 H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix E 205
47. ASD is not connected to the leads are connected lines from the ASD are motor properly and securely inactive or missing AU V or W fuse is open Measure the individual blown running current of the U AU V or W contactor is V and W leads no open current problem line AU Vor W HCT is defective ERR2 Main RAM Fault This fault is caused by Defective RAM Make a service call corrupted RAM data or an inability to read the RAM data ERR3 Main ROM Fault This fault is caused by Defective ROM Make a service call corrupted ROM data or an inability to read the ROM data ERR4 CPU Fault This fault is caused by a Defective CPU Make a service call CPU malfunction ERRS Communication This fault is caused by an e Corrupted data at the master e Ensure that the master Interruption Fault inability of the ASD to ASD ASD is programmed communicate with an Broken or improper properly optional device or another connections associated with Ensure that the ASD in a master follower the setup connections are correct configuration Improper setup information and secured at the follower device Confirm all communications settings ERR6 Gate Array Fault This fault results when a Gate array output Make a service call given input to the gate array discrepancy results in an unexpected Defective gate array output ERR7 Output Current This fault occurs when the Defective HCT Make a service call D
48. Appendix F H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 17 DCL Selection Table Model Number DCL Part DCL Inductance DCL VT130H7U Number mH Amps 6750 36365 0 20 114 0 610K 36366 0 20 141 0 612K 36367 0 15 175 0 615K 41443 0 19 260 0 620K 41443 0 19 260 0 625K 45259 0 10 360 0 H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix F 209 Appendix G H7 Optional Devices The ASD may be equipped with several options which are used to expand the functionality of the ASD Table 18 lists the available options and their functions Table 18 H7 Optional devices and functions Item Device Function ASD7 SIM2 Emulates the input control signals of the H7 ASD via switches and pots ASD BPC Provides dust protection for the H7 ASD when the EOI is removed or mounted remotely ASD CAB PC Female 9 pin d type to RJ 45 PC to ASD cable ASD EOI N4 A replacement NEMA 4 EOI without Rotary Encoder ASD ISO 1 Provides isolation of the Control Board output circuit from the AM FM output and from the II input ASD MTG KIT EOI Remote Mounting Kit See the section titled EOI Remote Mounting on pg 200 for further information on this option ASD RTC The Real Time Clock provides the user with a time stamp of the Start Run and Fault events This option board is used to provide a hardware based speed search function ASD SS Note The ASD SS is a factory authorized service center installed option for all 1 5 HP ASDs 1
49. Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 485 Communication Card Direct Access Number F422 Parameter Type Selection list Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Tension Torque Bias Input Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function and identifies the source of the Tension Torque Bias input signal when enabled Settings Disabled RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 485 Communication Card H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F423 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes 125 F424 F426 Load Sharing Gain Input Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function and is enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 485 Communication Card Direct Access Number F424 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Forward Speed Limit Input Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control function When enabled and operating in the T
50. Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 1 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 When operating with the Automatic Accel Decel enabled F000 the minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F010 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds Maximum Frequency Program Fundamental Parameters Frequency Settings This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can output This setting is also referred to as FH Accel decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting Note This setting may not be lower than the Upper Limit setting F012 Direct Access Number F011 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 30 0 Maximum 400 0 Units Hz Upper Limit Frequency Program Fundamental Parameters Frequency Settings This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD may output frequencies higher th
51. Direct Access Number F724 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run Yes LED Option Override Multiplication Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt Override Control If operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter provides a value to be used in the event that Setting is selected for the Frequency Override Multiplying Input F661 H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F729 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 00 Maximum 100 00 167 F800 F803 Communication Baud Rate logic Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Direct Access Number F800 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 9600 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1200 Maximum 9600 Units BPS Parity Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Parity setting of the communications link The communications network includes oth
52. Dynamic Braking Enable Program Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking This parameter Enables Disables the Dynamic Braking system if so equipped Settings Enabled with Overload Disabled Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking uses the inertial energy of the load to produce a braking force or it may be used to reduce the bus voltage in an attempt to preclude an overvoltage trip during deceleration The inertial energy of the load drives the rotor and induces a current into the stator of the motor The induced stator current energy is dissipated through a resistive load The resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB non polarized Using a low value high wattage resistance as a load for the generated current the resistive load dissipates the induced energy The dissipated energy is the energy that would otherwise have caused the rotor to continue to rotate Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly it cannot act as a holding brake The Dynamic Braking function may be setup and enabled by connecting a braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper information at F304 F308 and F309 For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given application contact Toshiba s Marketing Department Note The Dynamic Braking function is not available on the 230 volt 30 and 40 HP the 400 volt 25 350 HP and the 600 volt 22 300 HP ASDs Direct Ac
53. F300 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 200 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 500 Maximum 15 000 Units kHz Break Make ST Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart This parameter Enables Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning motor when the ST CC connection momentarily opens and is then closed Break Make ST or after a power interruption momentary power failure This parameter also Enables Disables F312 and F313 Direct Access Number F301 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Ridethrough Mode Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter determines the motor control response of the drive in the event of a momentary power outage Settings Off Ridethrough Stop Direct Access Number F302 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Changeable During Run Yes Number of Retries Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart After a trip has occurred this parameter sets the number of times that an automatic system restart is attempted See the section titled Safety Precautions on pg 2 for further information on this setting H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F303 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 00 Maximum 10 109 F304 F306
54. F836 1 Scan Transmit F841 2 Scan Transmit F842 3 Scan Transmit F843 Scan Transmit Settings 4 Scan Transmit F844 5 Scan Transmit F845 6 Scan Transmit F846 H7 ASD Operation Manual 43 Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number Communication Setting Communication Error Command Request Disposition on Error F830 P t Optional Parameter 1 F890 Optional Parameter 2 F891 Optional Parameters Optional Parameter 3 F892 Optional Parameter 4 F893 Optional Parameter 5 F894 Meter Terminal Adjustment FM Terminal Assignment F005 t FM FM Terminal Adjustment F006 AM Terminal Assignment F670 AM AM Terminal Adjustment F671 Analog 1 Terminal Assignment F672 Analog Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment F673 Analog 2 Terminal Assignment F674 Analog2 Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment F675 Motor Parameters AutoTune Enable Disable and Reset Config F400 AutoTune Enable Disable of Motor Constant 3 F414 Slip Frequency Gain F401 Motor Constant 1 primary resistance F402 Vector Motor Model Motor Constant 2 secondary resistance F403 Motor Constant 3 exciting inductance F404 Motor Constant 4 load inertia F405 Motor Constant 5 leakage inductance F410 Number of Motor Poles F411 Motor Settings Motor Capacity kW F412 Motor Type F413 1 Base Frequency F014 1 Max Output Voltage F306 Motor Set
55. FL F132 Output Terminal Function 4 F133 5 F134 6 F135 7 F136 Acc Dec Base Frequency Adjustment F650 Analog Input Functions Upper limit Frequency Adjustment F651 Acceleration Time Adjustment F652 36 H7 ASD Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number Terminal Selection Deceleration Time Adjustment F653 t Analog Input Functions ano Torque Boost Adjustment F654 Low Speed Signal Output Frequency F100 Reach Settings Speed Reach Setting Frequency F101 FP Terminal Meter Selection F676 FP Terminal Settings FP Terminal Meter Adjustment F677 ST Signal Selection F103 F R Priority Selection w both on F105 Input Special Functions Input Terminal Priority F106 Extended Terminal Function F107 Commercial Power Switching On Trip F354 Enable Disable Switching Frequency Setting and Enable F355 Disable Pme powcr Inverter Output Switching Wait Time F356 Commercial Input Power Wait Time F357 Commercial Power Switching Frequency 7 F358 Hold Time F F140 R F141 ST F142 Input Terminal Delays RES F143 51 54 F144 S5 S16 F145 1 On Delay F150 Out Off Delay F160 Out2 On Delay F151 Out2 Off Delay F161 FL On Delay F152 FL Off Delay F162 Output Terminal Delays Out4 On Delay F153 Out4 Off Delay F163 Out5 On Delay F154 Out5 Off Delay F164 Out6 On Delay F155 Out
56. Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 12 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 12 Preset Speed F291 Direct Access Number F392 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 13 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 13 Preset Speed F292 Direct Access Number F393 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 14 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 14 Preset Speed F293 Direct Access Number F394 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 15 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 15 Preset Speed F294 Direct Access Number F395 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Vector Motor Model Autotune Command Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter sets the Autotune command status Settings Autotune Disabled Reset Motor Defaults Enable Autotune on Run Command Direct Access Number F400
57. H7 ASD Operation Manual F602 F605 Trip Save at Power Down Enable Program Protection Parameters Trip Settings This parameter Enables Disables the Trip Save at Power Down setting When enabled this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the system powers down The trip information may be viewed from the Monitor screen When disabled the trip information will be cleared when the system powers down Direct Access Number F602 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Emergency Off Mode Settings Program Protection Parameters gt Emergency Off Settings This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use this feature This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay to change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to Fault FL all see F132 Note A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone Settings Coast Stop Deceleration Stop DC Injection Braking Stop Direct Access Number F603 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Coast Stop Changeable During Run No Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time Program Protection Parameters gt Emergency Off Settings Whe
58. Maximum 1000 0 Load Torque Filter Acc Dec Torque Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control Load Inertia This parameter is used to set the response sensitivity when calculating the accel decel torque This setting applies to load inertia compensation while operating in the Drooping Control mode This parameter should be gradually adjusted to provide smoother Drooping Control operation while operating with heavy loads Direct Access Number F326 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 200 0 Drooping Reference Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control Drooping Reference This parameter sets the method to be used in determining the output torque while operating in the Drooping Control mode Settings Total Torque Calculated by the Detection Current Torque without Acc Dec Torque Calculated by Detection Current Total Torque Calculated by the Command Current Torque without Acc Dec Torque Calculated by the Command Current Direct Access Number F327 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Total torque calculated by the detection current Changeable During Run Yes On Trip Powerline Switching Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter Enables Disables the On Trip Powerline Switching feature When enabled the system is instructed to discontinue using
59. Motor Parameters Motor Set 4 The Motor 3 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 4 output voltage at the Base Frequency F178 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 4 are configured and selected Motor set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F179 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts Motor 4 Torque Boost Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 4 Base Frequency setting F178 See parameter F016 Motor 1 Torque Boost for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 4 are configured and selected Motor set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F180 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units 46 79 F181 F190 Elect
60. N 52291 10 32 Hex Nut P N 01922 4 ea e 10 Split Lock Washer P N 01923 4 ea 10 Flat Washer P N 01924 4 ea Dust Cover P N ASD BPC Optional Extender Cables ASD CABTF Cable RJ45 7 ft ASD CABIOF Cable RJ45 10 ft ASD CABISF Cable RJAS 15 ft EOI Installation Precautions Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes of the EOI The ambient temperature rating for the EOI is 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C e Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user e Avoid installation in areas where vibration heat humidity dust metal particles or high levels of electrical noise EMI are present e Do not install the EOI where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gasses water solvents or other fluids e Turn the power on only after securing the front cover to the ASD Appendix C H7 ASD Operation Manual EOI Remote Mounting w o the ASD MTG KIT Note See Figure 31 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 5 1 At the EOI mounting location identify and mark the location of the 3 80 by 3 29 hole and the 7 32 screw holes 2 Cut the 3 80 by 3 29 rectangular hole 3 Drill the four 7 32 screw holes 4 Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the mounting location using the four 6 32 x 5 16 pan head screws the 6 split lock washers an
61. Seconds Pattern Run 8 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 8 This parameter sets the run time value for the 8 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F592 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 9 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 9 This parameter sets the run time value for the 9 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run 152 Direct Access Number F593 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F594 F597 Pattern Run 10 Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F594 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 10 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 10 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Changeable During Ne Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 11 Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F595 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 11 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 11 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Change
62. Selection gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip e Program gt Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt Use RR e Provide a Run command F or R Gain and Bias Settings When operating in the Speed Control mode the settings that determine the gain and bias of the RR terminal are Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F211 the RR input signal level that represents RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F210 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F213 and the RR input signal level that represents RR Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F212 When operating in the Torque Control mode the settings that determine the gain and bias of the RR terminal are Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F214 the RR input signal level that represents the RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F210 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F215 and e the RR input signal level that represents the RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F212 Once set as the RR input voltage changes the output frequency or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the RR input level that represents RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 torque or frequency This value is entered as 0 100 of the 0 10 VDC RR input signal range The input signal may be trimmed using F472 Bias and F473 Gain This paramete
63. Special Parameters Dead Parameter Type Selection List Band of 0 Hz Frequency Factory Default Standard DC This parameter selects the go to zero method to be used by the ASD when the Injection Braking ASD is commanded to go to zero Hz Changeable During Run No Settings Standard DC Injection Braking 0 Hz Command H7 ASD Operation Manual 103 F260 F260 Jog Run Frequency Direct Access Number F260 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Jog Settings Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog Jogging is Factory Default 0 00 the term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor driven equipment is required Changeable During Run Yes Enabling the Jog Window allows for the Manual Jog window to be among the Minimum 0 00 screens accessed during repeated MON PRG entries This screen must be displayed when Jogging using the EOI Maximum 20 00 The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI or remotely via the Control Units Hz Terminal Strip or using Communications for further information on using Communications for Jogging see the Communications manual To perform a Jog set this parameter F260 to the desired Jog frequency Select a Jog Stop method F261 Jog Using the EOI To initiate a Jog from the EOI perform the following 1 Place a check in the Enable Jog Window box Pr
64. Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD Direct Access Number F472 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 120 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RR Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RR Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F473 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 61 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RX Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the contr
65. Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Electronic Thermal Protection 1 Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 1 The Motor 1 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 1 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than Direct Access Number F600 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Overcurrent Stall Level Program Protection Parameters Stall This parameter specifies the output current level at which the output frequency is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip The overcurrent level is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive 154 Direct Access Number F601 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 0 Units
66. at F306 There are four Base Frequency profile settings 1 4 Note For proper motor operation the Base Frequency is normally set for the name plated frequency of the motor Direct Access Number F014 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 400 0 Units Hz V f Pattern Program Fundamental Parameters Frequency Settings This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage Settings Constant Torque Variable Torque Automatic Torque Boost Sensorless Vector Control speed Auto Torque Boost with Automatic Energy Savings Sensorless Vector Control speed with Automatic Energy Savings V f 5 Point Setting opens 5 point setting screen Sensorless Vector Control speed torque switching PG Feedback Vector Control speed torque switching PG Feedback Vector Control speed position switching Note For proper operation the carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes The Automatic Torque Boost and the Sensorless Vector Control selections use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for the motor being used If Load Reactors or Long Lead Filters are used or if the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor manual tuning of the motor parameters may be required for op
67. coefficient of the circuit to obtain an output that corresponds with a known input This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices DVM counters etc Direct Access Number F675 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 FP Terminal Setting Program Terminal Selection Parameters FP This parameter commands the multifunction programmable FP terminal to monitor the value of 1 of 31 possible system functions As the monitored function changes in magnitude or frequency the pulse count of the FP output pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the monitored function As the monitored value goes up so does the pulse count of the FP output Note The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 5 0 uS Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 5 on pg 50 Direct Access Number F676 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes FP Terminal Adjustment Program Terminal Selection Parameters FP This parameter sets the full scale reading of the FP Terminal The full scale reading of the monitored variable selected in F676 may be set here Direct Access Number F677 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 3 840 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 000 Maximum 43 200 Units k
68. either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Changeable During Run Yes This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a Minimum 0 0 given VI II input level and motor load Maximum 250 0 See F201 for further information on this setting This parameter sets Torque Reference Setpoint 1 46 and is the output Units torque value that is associated with the setting of F201 This value is entered as 0 to 250 of the rated torque H7 ASD Operation Manual 85 F206 F208 VIAM Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints VIII This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminals when either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given VI II input level and motor load See F201 for further information on this setting This parameter sets Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of F203 This value is entered as 0 to 250 of the rated torque Direct Access Number F206 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 250 0 Units Frequency Mode 2 Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection This parameter
69. fin the Vector control mode adjust the response time or e Switch to the Constant Torque control mode 20 H7 ASD Operation Manual Load produced Negative Torque When the drive is used with a load that produces negative torque an overhauling load the over voltage or over current protective functions of the drive may cause nuisance tripping To minimize the undesirable effects of negative torque the dynamic braking system may be used if so equipped The dynamic braking system converts the regenerated energy into heat and is dissipated using a braking resistor The braking resistor must be suitably matched to the load Dynamic braking is also effective in reducing the DC bus voltage during a momentary over voltage condition If under extreme conditions the dynamic braking system or a component of this system were to fail the dynamic braking resistor may experience an extended over current condition The DBR circuit was designed to dissipate excessive amounts of heat and if the extended over current condition were allowed to exceed the circuit parameters this condition could result in a fire hazard To combat this condition the 3 phase input may be connected using contactors that are configured to open in the event of an extended DBR over current condition or an internal circuit failure Using a thermal sensor and or overload protection as the 3 phase input contactor drive signal the contactors will open and remove the 3 phase input power in
70. full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps V A or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than Direct Access Number F173 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Motor 3 Base Frequency Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Maximum Output Voltage is set at F175 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 3 are configured and selected Motor set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the name plated frequency of the motor Direct Access Number F174 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 400 0 Units Hz Motor 3 Max Output Voltage Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 3 output voltage at the Base Frequ
71. in accordance with established safety practices e Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices Installation of ASD systems should conform to the 1999 National Electrical Code Article 110 NEC Requirements For Electrical Installations all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and any other applicable national regional or industry codes and standards Ensure that the Run functions F R Preset Speed etc of the ASD are off before performing a Reset The post reset settings may allow the ASD to start unexpectedly In the event of a power failure the motor may restart after power is restored Retry or Reset settings may allow the motor to start unexpectedly Warnings to this effect should be clearly posted near the ASD and motor DO NOT install operate perform maintenance or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the following product warnings and user directions Failure to do so may result in equipment damage operator injury or loss of life Installation Precautions e Uselockout tagout procedures on the branch circuit disconnect before installing the ASD Do Not mount the device in a location that would produce catastrophic results if it were to fall from its mounting location equipment damage or injury e Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user e Avoid installation in
72. input value of 255p that represents the BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F228 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F233 and the binary input value of 255p that represents the BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F230 Once set as the BIN input word changes the directional information the output frequency or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets BIN Reference Setpoint 1 direction torque frequency and is entered as 0 to 100 of the BIN binary input word 11111111 255p H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F228 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units 46 Frequency Settings 100 F230 Setpoint 2 CO Input Signal Setpoint 1 Col F228 everse utput Frequency 9 Setpoint 1 Hz Torque Settings Fa30 Setpoint 2 Col Input Signal Setpoint 1 I 8 everse Output Torque F232 F233 Setpoint 1 Torque Setpoint 2 Torque 97 F229 F232 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints BIN This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while op
73. is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further Changeable During Run Yes information on this parameter Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 9 Direct Access Number F288 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds 9 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1001 and is Factory Default 0 0 identified as Preset Speed 9 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the 3 Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further Changeable During Run Yes information on this parameter Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 10 Direct Access Number F289 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 10 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1010 and is Factory Default 0 00 identified as Preset Speed 10 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further Changeable During Run Yes information on this parameter Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 11 Direct Access Number F290 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 11 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary num
74. mS OUT1 Off Delay Direct Access Number F160 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUT1 Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT1 A amp C output terminals by the programmed value Changeable During Run No The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT1 to Minimum 2 0 respond Maximum 200 0 Units mS OFF Delay Time OFF Condition is Met Contacts Upen H7 ASD Operation Manual 75 F161 F165 OUT2 Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUT2 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT2 A amp C output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT2 to respond Direct Access Number F161 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS FL Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays FL This parameter delays the opening of the FL output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to FL to respond Direct Access Number F162 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 M
75. minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 This setting is also used to determine the acceleration rate of the Motorized Pot function Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time 136 Direct Access Number F500 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F501 F501 Decel 2 Time Direct Access Number F501 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Parameter Type Numerical Settings Factory Default drive dependent This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 2 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the Motorized Pot function Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time H7 ASD Operation Manual 137 F502 F502 Accel Decel Pattern 1 Direct Access Number
76. motor when the stop command is issued via a Stop command from the LED Keypad The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at F250 F251 and F252 The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load Settings Decel Stop Coast Stop Note The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603 If using the LCD EOL press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Direct Access Number F721 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Decel Stop Changeable During Run Yes Torque Limit Group No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor The settings of profiles 1 4 may be setup at F441 F444 F446 and F448 respectively Note If using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Direct Access Number F723 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run Yes Feedback in Panel Mode No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables Disables PID feedback control Note If using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter
77. must be set to Motorized Pot Simulation The MOP deceleration rate is determined by the F501 setting 46 Motorized Pot Clear Connecting this terminal to CC clears the last Motorized Pot frequency settings see F108 for further information on this setting 47 Momentary Push Run When connected to CC this terminal setting starts the motor 48 Momentary Push Stop When connected to CC this terminal setting stops the motor 49 Forward Reverse This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run Stop 50 function When configured to Run Run Stop to CC connecting this terminal to CC changes the direction of the motor 50 Run Stop This terminal enables the motor to run when connected to CC and disables the motor when the connection is broken 51 Line Power Bypass This function operates in conjunction with the Line Power Switching frequency setting F355 An enabled check box at Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching At and this input terminal setting enables this function Once configured the frequency setting of Line Power Switching Hz establishes the speed at which the drive terminates its output and routes commercial power to the motor 68 H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 6 Continued Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 52 Frequency Priority Connecting this termin
78. of a brake failure After a brake failure has occurred this clock setting will begin to count down Once this time has elapsed a signal will be provided to indicate that the brake has failed This signal may be used to halt a related system function or to notify the user 160 Direct Access Number F630 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F631 F651 Position Difference Limit Droop Pulses Allowed Direct Access Number F631 Program Feedback Parameters Feedback Settings Parameter Type Numerical While operating in the Drooping Control mode this parameter sets the Factory Default 16 0 maximum allowed difference between the number of pulses that are detected within the multiple motor group Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6553 Release After Run Timer Direct Access Number F632 Program Protection Parameters Brake Fault Timer Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the time that the brake will hold after the Run command Factory Default 0 00 criteria has been met Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Acc Dec Base Frequency Adjustment Direct Access Number F650 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Analog Input Functions Parameter Type Selection List This parameter Enables D
79. records 2 18 are comprised of the first 16 parameters of Table 8 and trip records 19 100 are comprised of the first 7 parameters of Table 8 Table 8 Trip History Record Parameters RTC option required At trip Recorded Parameters 1 Trip Number 9 Bus Voltage 17 Torque Reference 25 ASD Load 2 Trip Type 10 Discrete Input Status 18 Torque Current 26 DBR Load 3 Time and Date 11 OUT1 OUT2 FL Status 19 Excitation Current 27 Input Power 4 Frequency at Trip 12 Timer 20 PID Value 28 Output Power 5 Output Current 13 Post Compensation Frequency 21 Motor Overload 29 Peak Current 6 Output Voltage 14 Feedback inst 22 ASD Overload 30 Peak Voltage 7 Direction 15 Feedback 1 sec 23 DBR Overload 31 PG Speed 8 Frequency Reference 16 Torque 24 Motor Load 32 PG Position 178 Trip Monitor From ASD The Trip Monitor From ASD function records the trip name of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as Most Recent Second Most Recent Third Most Recent and Fourth Most Recent Once reset Clear Trip the trip records are erased If no trips have occurred since the last reset No Fault is displayed for each trip record Note An improper ASD setup may cause some trips reset the ASD to the Factory Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction Program Utility Parameters gt Type Reset Restore Factory Defaults Trip Record at Monitor Screen The at
80. selects the source of the frequency command signal to be used as Frequency Mode 2 in the event that Frequency Mode 1 is disabled or if Frequency Mode 2 is set up as the primary control parameter See F200 for additional information on this setting Settings Use Use RR Use RX Use Option Card RX2 Use LED Keypad Option Use Binary BCD Input Use EOI Use RS232 485 Use Communication Card Use Motorized Pot Simulation Use Pulse Input Option Direct Access Number F207 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Changeable During Run Yes Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency This parameter sets the threshold frequency that will be used in F200 to determine if Frequency Source 1 or 2 will control the output of the ASD See F200 for additional information on this setting 86 Direct Access Number F208 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F209 F209 Analog Input Filter Direct Access Number F209 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Analog Filter Parameter Type Selection List Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a Factory Default None digital signal The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over t
81. sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping during regeneration This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive Direct Access Number F617 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 150 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Overtorque Detection Time Program Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter sets the amount of time that the overtorque condition may exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616 and F617 before a trip occurs Direct Access Number F618 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 50 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Seconds Cooling Fan Control Program Protection Parameters Cooling Fan Settings This parameter sets the cooling fan run time command Settings Automatic Always On Direct Access Number F620 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Automatic Changeable During Run Yes Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting Program Protection Parameters Cumulative Run Timer This parameter sets a run time value that once exceeded closes a contact The output signal may be used to control external equipment or used to engage a brake Note The time displayed is 1 10th of the actual time 0 1 hr 1 0 hr 158 Direct Access Number F621 Parameter Type N
82. the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set at F612 156 Direct Access Number F610 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F611 F615 Low Current Trip Threshold Program Protection Parameters Low Current Settings When the low current monitor is enabled this function sets the low current trip threshold The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive Direct Access Number F611 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units 46 Low Current Trip Threshold Time Program Protection Parameters Low Current Settings When the low current monitor is enabled this function sets the time that the low current condition must exist to cause a trip Direct Access Number F612 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Units Seconds Short Circuit Test Program Protection Parameters Arm Short Check Settings This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short Circuit test Settings Every Run Every Powerup Direct Access Number F613 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Every Run Changeable During Run No Short Circuit Test Dura
83. the event of an extended DBR over current or system over voltage condition Motor Braking The motor may continue to rotate and coast to a stop after being shut off due to the inertia of the load If an immediate stop is required a braking system should be used The two most common types of motor braking systems used with the H7 ASD are DC Injection Braking and Dynamic Braking For further information on braking systems see DC Injection Braking on pg 102 and Dynamic Braking Enable on pg 110 H7 ASD Operation Manual 21 Drive Characteristics 22 Overcurrent Protection Each H7 ASD model was designed for a specified operating power range The ASD will incur a trip if the design specifications are exceeded However the ASD may be operated at 120 of the specified range for a limited amount of time as indicated in Appendix D on pg 203 Also the Overcurrent Stall Level may be adjusted to help with nuisance over current trips see F601 When using the drive for an application that controls a motor which is rated significantly less than the maximum current rating of the drive the over current limit Thermal Overload Protection setting will have to be changed to match the application For further information on this parameter see Electronic Thermal Protection 1 Drive Capacity The H7 ASD must not be used with a motor that has a significantly larger capacity even if the motor is operated under a small load A drive being used in
84. the rated capacity of the H7 DBR Overload Displays the DBR Overload value as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity Motor Load Displays the Motor Load in real time as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor ASD Load Displays the ASD Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 DBR Load Displays the DBR Load as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity Input Power Displays the Input Power in Kilowatts Kw Output Power Displays the Output Power in Kilowatts Kw Peak Current Displays the Peak Current since the last start was initiated The current is displayed as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 Peak Voltage Displays the Peak Voltage since the last start was initiated The voltage is displayed as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 PG Speed Displays the PG Speed Direction Displays the Direction command forward reverse H7 ASD Operation Manual PG Position Displays the Pulse Generator Position RR Displays the RR input value as a percentage of the full range of the RR value potentiometer input VI II Displays the VI input setting as a percentage of the full range of VI II value Note The input represents two analog inputs and terminals The VI input terminal is primarily used for a 0 10 VDC analog signal and the II input terminal is used for current loop applications such as with a
85. the value entered here the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback Direct Access Number F374 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 100 0 Maximum 1000 Current Control Integral Gain Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter sets the degree and rate at which the output frequency will be allowed to change when prompted by changes in the output current The larger the value entered here the quicker more the drive responds to changes in feedback Direct Access Number F375 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 100 0 Maximum 1250 Speed Loop Proportional Gain Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter sets the Proportional Gain sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the PG signal to control speed The larger the value entered here the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback and the quicker it responds H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F376 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 3 2 Maximum 1000 119 F377 F382 Speed Loop Integral Gain Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter sets the response time of the Speed Loop Integral Gain The smaller the value h
86. this way will be susceptible to the high output peak current which may result in nuisance tripping Do not apply a level of input voltage to a drive that is beyond that which the drive is rated The input voltage may be stepped down when required with the use of a step down transformer or some other type of voltage reduction system Using Vector Control Using Vector Control enables the system to produce very high torque over the entire operating range even at extremely low speeds Vector Control may be used with or without feedback However using feedback increases the speed accuracy for applications requiring precise speed control Enabling the Automatic Energy Savings further increases the efficiency of the H7 ASD while maintaining its robust performance Vector Control is not capable of operating multiple motors connected in parallel See F015 on pg 53 for further information on using Vector Control Local Remote Operation While running in the Local mode at a non zero speed if the RJ45 connector is removed from the EOI and then reinserted the ASD remains in the Local mode even though the Local LED is off press Run to illuminate the Local LED The ASD output remains at the frequency of the Frequency Command field at the time of the disconnect so long as the connector is disconnected Once reinserted the reference frequency that was loaded into the EEPROM not RAM before the disconnect will be the frequency to which the ASD output
87. timer expire before the brake releases or before the Braking Answer is returned fault E 11will occur Otherwise the brake releases the motor and normal motor operations resume The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup but may be used when the brake is applied while the motor is running 65 System Consistent Sequence BA braking answer This setting is required when the Braking Release 64 function is used The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned the status of the braking system The returned status is either Released or Not Released If Released is returned within the time setting of F632 normal system function resumes If Not Released is returned or if the F632 time setting times out before either signal is returned then fault E 11 occurs The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem 66 System Consistent Sequence BT braking test TBD 67 Output Frequency Hold TBD H7 ASD Operation Manual 69 F130 F133 OUT1 Output Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment OUT1 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT1 A amp C output terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the OUT1 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the outp
88. trip condition of the last incurred trip may be viewed at the Monitor screen The Monitor screen at trip record is erased when the ASD is reset Clearing a Trip Once the cause of the trip has been corrected performing a Reset re enables the ASD for normal operation The record of a trip may also be cleared using either of the following methods e Cycling power trip info may be saved via F602 if required e Pressing the Stop Reset key twice e Remotely via the communications channel e Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Control Terminal Strip or e Via Program gt Utility Parameters Type Reset gt Clear Trip clears Trip Monitor From ASD H7 ASD Operation Manual H7 Codes and Error Messages Table 9 lists the User notification codes and System Status Indicators and suggests an associated course of action to correct system malfunctions The user notification codes appear in the top right corner of the Frequency Command screen while the associated function is active Troubleshooting and Interpreting H7 Error Messages Note The listed codes may only appear briefly before displaying the ASD Fault screen for incurred trips To view trip information see Viewing Trip Information on pg 177 When operating without the RTC option and before resetting the ASD the at trip information may be viewed from the Monitor screen Table 9 H7 Error Codes and System Status Indicator information EOI
89. via Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Settings gt Command Mode Note The LED Keypad is under development and is unavailable at the time of the release of this manual The availability of the Local mode of operation Command and Frequency control may be disabled via Program EOI Option Setups gt Local Remote Key The availability of the Local mode of operation may be reinstated by changing this setting or performing a Reset see F007 Enter Key Selects a menu item to be changed or accepts and records the changed data of the selected field same as pressing the Rotary Encoder Esc Key Returns to the previous level of the menu tree toggles between the Panel and the Frequency Command screens or cancels changes made to a field if pressed while still in the reverse video mode dark background light text Run Key Issues the Run command while in the Local mode Run Key Status LED Illuminates green while stopped or red while running Stop Key Issues the Off command decelerates to Stop at the programmed rate if pressed once while in the Local mode or initiates an Emergency Off terminates the ASD output and applies the brake if so configured if pressed twice quickly from the Local or Remote modes Up Key Increases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls up the menu listing continues during press and hold Down Key Decreases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls down the me
90. when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F446 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Regeneration Torque Limit 3 Program Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F447 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 96 Driving Torque Limit 4 Program Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles 130 Direct Access Number F448 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual F449 F452 Regeneration Torque Limit 4 Direct Access Number F449 Program Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Parameter Type Numerical Settings Factory Default 250 0 This parameter is used to set th
91. 0 25 HP 230 volt ASDs and 15 40 HP 460 volt ASDs see F314 ASD TBI ACI Provides 120 VAC discrete terminal activation and additional I O terminals Conduit Extender Box option Provides more working space for conduit installation than the standard conduit plate Provides rotational speed and or directional information The Encoder is mounted on the motor shaft the shaft driven equipment ASD Multicom Option Boards Note Multicom boards are identified as ASD Multicom A B F etc bx Incorporates the Modbus Profibus or Device Net communications protocol for system control and is able to receive and process Vector Control feedback B Provides a line driver and open collector interface for system control F The Tosline F10 interface provides high speed communication to Toshiba control equipment via twisted pair wiring J Able to receive and process vector control feedback via line driver or open collector interface S The Tosline S20 interface provides high speed communication to Toshiba control equipment via fiber optics X Provides extended terminal I O functions for monitoring feedback and control Note See the user manual of the applicable option for further information on each item 210 Appendix G H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix H H7 ASD Spare Parts Listing Table 19 230 Volt 3 0 40 HP Spare Parts Listing
92. 1 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 2 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 2 Preset Speed F019 120 Direct Access Number F382 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F383 F390 Preset Speed Direction 3 Direct Access Number F383 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 3 Preset Speed F020 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 4 Direct Access Number F384 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 4 Preset Speed F021 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 5 Direct Access Number F385 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 5 Preset Speed F022 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 6 Direct Access Number F386 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the
93. 1 Priority is selected here and the commanded frequency exceeds the F208 setting Frequency Mode 1 has priority over Frequency Mode 2 If Frequency Source 22 Priority is selected here and the commanded frequency exceeds the F208 setting Frequency Mode 2 has priority over Frequency Mode 1 Frequency Source Priority Switching allows for a contact closure at a preconfigured input terminal to toggle control between Frequency Source 1 and Frequency Source 2 Any of the programmable input terminals may be programmed as the Frequency Source Priority Switching terminal H7 ASD Operation Manual 83 F201 F201 VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints VIII This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminals when either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode Note See note on pg 33 for further information on the VI I terminal Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the terminals e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip e Program gt Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 Use VI II e Provide a Run command F or R Gain and Bias Settings When operating in the Speed Control mode the settings that determine the gain
94. 190 for additional information on custom V f curves Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency Direct Access Number F192 Program Special Control Parameters Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical The Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency sets the frequency to be Factory Default 0 0 associated with parameter F193 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage Changeable During Run No See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Minimum 0 0 Maximum 400 Units Hz Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage Direct Access Number F193 Program Special Control Parameters Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical The Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage establishes the percentage of Factory Default 0 0 the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F192 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency Changeable During Run No See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency Direct Access Number F194 Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical The Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency sets the frequency to be Factory Default 0 0 associated with parameter F195 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage Changeable During No S
95. 20 Power Factor Correction uester ei p PR i p Re 20 Light Load Conditions wenei te EO ERE UR RUD ERROR sector Gans 20 Motor Load Combinations eese nennen ener E nennen rene nets nnne nentes 20 Load produced Negative Torque 2 2 22 21 Motor Braking ics ioter he aA E O E 21 Drive Characteristics sccssssssssscssscsscsscsssssccscsssssscnscsssssscsscccesssssscssesssssscccesssssssscssesssenses 22 Overcurrent Protection 3 236 aiii Msi 22 Drive Capacity ee uet ene el ee dea a Od e ee 22 Using Vector Control eder ertt rs dovete pede eeertas 22 Local Remote Operation eee nieder 22 Electronic Operator Interface eee eee ee eee eee eee ense sese 23 HOD Features a etos repo eek ce be EAN itte die eot ob ike 23 BOL Operation zn get eee et eee 24 System T M iS 25 Imtial Setup iios cedere UO eet tres oet esie et DI er it es 25 Operation Local EE 25 Default Setang Changes iei cd tenent tah ttes 26 H7 Operation Manual i Startup Wizard Requirements ccsscssssccsssssccsssscsssscscesssssccsscessssscssesssssessecssssssssssesesees 27 System Configuration and Menu Options sscsssccssscsecsssssccesssscssscesceescssssessseeesssseses 30 h
96. 20 mA 0 1 ma lt q LENN 4 20 mA switched to change the full scale reading of the AM and FM output terminals See F670 and F005 for further information on the AM and FM terminal adjustments II Terminals The input and output terminals of the Control Terminal Strip For further information on these terminals see pg 11 P24 RES et a 14 H7 ASD Operation Manual CN7 Pinout Listed below is the default pinout of the CN7 connector The CN7 connector is the 25 pin D type connector of the Control Board see Figure 6 Table 3 CN7 Default Pinout Assignments Pin Number Function Pin Number Function 1 PP 14 II 2 FL 15 S1 3 VI 16 R 4 RR 17 S3 5 FM 18 S2 6 RX 19 N15 7 FP 20 54 8 21 15 9 OUTI 22 P24 10 OUT2 23 CC 11 ST 24 CC 12 RES 25 13 ES Note Open collector outputs Figure 6 Control Board of the H7 ASD P N 48700 EOI connection and Common Serial TTL I O CNU2 a Dy em ju w n j i i i EOI connection and fau TID E EP cl E lt r LI i RS232 or RS485 signal I O CNU1 CNU4 CN7 25 pin D type connector H7 ASD Operation Manual 15 CNU1 1A and CNU2 2A Pinout Pin CNU1 Pinout CNU1A Pinout Pin CNU2 Pinout CNU2A Pinout Controller PWA EOl Controller PWA EOl 1 P24 P24 1 P24 P24 2 Gnd Gnd 2 Gnd Gnd 3 Tx Rx 3
97. 4 20 mA signal Either may be used as a frequency or torque command source however the two cannot function simultaneously Throughout this manual they will be listed as VIII RX Displays the RX input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX value 10 to 10 VDC input RX2 Displays the RX2 input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX2 value Note The RX2 function is available on the ASD Multicom option board only FM Displays the output frequency value as a percentage of the full range of the FM value AM Displays the output current as a percentage of the full range of the AM value Option Type Displays the type form number of the installed ASD Multicom option board Option Term A TBD Option Term B TBD Option Term O TBD Option Term P TBD Max Output TBD Fault Status Displays the current fault or No Fault H7 ASD Operation Manual 33 Program Mode Table 4 lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections The Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable The functions listed may be accessed and changed as mapped below or via the Direct Access method Program Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number Table 4 Program mode mapping Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub
98. 5 Use Communication Card Use Motorized Pot Simulation Use Pulse Input Option Direct Access Number F004 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Use RR Changeable During Run No FM Terminal Assignment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters FM This setting determines the output function of the FM analog output terminal The FM output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 5 on pg 50 Note To read voltage at this terminal a 100 5000 resistor is required and it must be connected from FM to FM The voltage is read across the 100 500Q resistor Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from FM to FM The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1 1024 The FM Terminal Adjustment F006 must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper response SW 2 may be switched to allow for the full range output to be either 0 1 mA or 4 20 mA when providing an output current or either 0 1 or 1 7 5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal Direct Access Number F005 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes FM Terminal Adjustment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters FM This function is used to calibrate th
99. 6 Off Delay F165 H7 ASD Operation Manual 37 Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Terminal Selection Out7 On Delay F156 Parameters Output Terminal Delays Out Delay p Frequency Setting Analog Filter Analog Input Filter Selection F209 Parameters VI F201 RR F210 RX F216 Speed Ref Setpoint RX2 F222 BIN F228 PG F234 Jog Run Frequency F260 Jog Settings Jog Stop Control F261 Jog Window Enable Disable N A 1 Frequency amp Characteristics F018 2 Frequency amp Characteristics F019 3 Frequency amp Characteristics F020 4 Frequency amp Characteristics F021 5 Frequency amp Characteristics F022 6 Frequency amp Characteristics F023 7 Frequency amp Characteristics F024 Preset Speeds 8 Frequency amp Characteristics F287 9 Frequency amp Characteristics F288 10 Frequency amp Characteristics F289 11 Frequency amp Characteristics F290 12 Frequency amp Characteristics F291 13 Frequency amp Characteristics F292 14 Frequency amp Characteristics F293 15 Frequency amp Characteristics F294 Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable Disable F380 Fwd Rev Disable Disable Forward Run Disable Reverse Run F311 Pot Setting Disposition at Power F108 Motorized Pot Settings Minimum Frequency N A Maximum Frequency N A 38 H7 ASD Operation Manual
100. 6 Preset Speed F023 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 7 Direct Access Number F387 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 7 Preset Speed F024 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 8 Direct Access Number F388 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 8 Preset Speed F287 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 9 Direct Access Number F389 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 9 Preset Speed F288 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 10 Direct Access Number F390 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Determines the forward reverse setting for the 10 Preset Speed F289 Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual 121 F391 F401 Preset Speed Direction 11 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 11 Preset Speed F290 Direct Access Number F391 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default
101. 85 Wire Count 171 Run Frequency 101 Run Frequency Hysteresis 101 Run Key 23 RX 11 12 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 91 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency 92 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 92 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency 92 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 92 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 93 RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 94 RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency 95 RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 95 RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency 95 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 95 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 96 221 S S1 11 12 S1 S4 Input Terminal Delay 73 S1 Input Terminal Assignment 63 S2 11 12 S2 Input Terminal Assignment 63 S3 11 12 S3 Input Terminal Assignment 63 84 11 12 S4 Input Terminal Assignment 63 S5 16 Input Terminal Delay 73 S5 Input Terminal Assignment 64 S6 Input Terminal Assignment 64 S7 Input Terminal Assignment 64 Safety Precautions 2 Scrolling Monitor 30 Scrolling Monitor Select 45 Service Life Information 4 SetPoints 40 Shipping Weight 188 Short Circuit Detect Pulse 40 Short Circuit Test 157 Short Circuit Test Duration 157 Soft Stall 54 Soft Stall Enable 39 Soft Start 40 Spare Parts Listing 211 S pattern 1 138 S pattern 2 138 S Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment 139 S Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment 140 Special Control Parameters 45 46 Special Parameters
102. Control mode This parameter sets the targeted speed The plus or minus value range for this setting may be set at F432 Direct Access Number F431 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Limit Torque Range Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets a plus or minus value range for the Speed Limit Torque Level F431 Direct Access Number F432 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Limit Torque Recovery Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the response time of the system to torque change requirements Direct Access Number F433 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 20 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Power Running Torque Limit 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter determines the source of the contro
103. EOI failure will result Settings No Slave normal operation Frequency Reference Output Command Frequency Torque Command Output Torque Command H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F806 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default No Slave normal operation Changeable During Run Yes 169 F810 F812 Communication Reference Adjust Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Reference Adjust This parameter selects the communications reference for scaling See F811 F814 for further information on this setting Scaling the communications signal is not required for all applications Settings Disabled Common Serial TTL RS232 485 Communication Card Direct Access Number F810 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Communications Reference Setpoint 1 Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Reference Adjust When enabled at F810 this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is received via the source selected at F810 Gain and Bias Settings When operating in the Speed Control mode and using one of the control sources from Settings above the settings that determine the gain and bias properties of the input signal are e Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 frequency F812
104. F102 will provide a signal at an output terminal that can close an appropriately configured output contact see Table 7 on pg 72 for the available output assignments H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F101 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 57 F102 F102 58 Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance Program Terminal Selection Parameters Reach Settings This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency F101 setting Direct Access Number F102 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 5 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F103 F103 ST Signal Selection Direct Access Number F103 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List This parameter is used to set the operation of the Standby ST control terminal Factory Default ST CC Required or any terminal configured as the ST terminal Changeable During Run No Settings ST to CC Required ST to CC Not Required Interlock with F R Terminal The setting ST to CC Required enables the ASD for operation so long as the control terminal ST is connected to CC via a jumper contact or other means Motor ST Off ST On eo N 2 6 The ST
105. F506 S Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment F507 Accel Decel Time Lower Limit F508 Accel Decel Special Accel Decel Switching Frequency 1 F505 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 2 F513 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 3 F517 Display Resolution F704 High Speed Operation at Light Load N A Light load High speed Operation Switching N A Crane Hoist Load Lower Limit Frequency Light load High speed Operation Load d Waiting Time H7 ASD Operation Manual 45 Program Menu Navigation Parameter Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name aramete Number Special Control Parameters Light load High speed Operation Load N A Detection Time Light load High speed Operation Heavy Load Detection Time Switching Load Torque During Forward Run N A Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in UE N A the Forward Direction Crane Hoist Load Heavy Load Torque During Deceleration in N A the Forward Direction Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run N A Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in OUR N A the Reverse Direction Heavy Load Torque During Deceleration in the Reverse Direction Frequency for Automatic High speed N A Operation at Light Load Backlash Setup Not available at the time of this release N A 1 Frequency Setting F190 1 Voltage Setting F191 2 Frequency Setting F192 2 Voltage Setting F193 3 Frequency Setting F194 V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage Setting F195 4 Frequency Setting F196 4 Voltage Setting F197 5 Frequency S
106. For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input parameters F228 F231 must be configured BIN Reference Point 1 BIN Reference 1 frequency Bin Reference Point 2 and BIN Reference 2 frequency Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down Direct Access Number F108 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Motorized Pot Settings Parameter Type Selection List When the Frequency Mode 1 Selection F004 setting is set to Use MOP Factory Default Store Function Simulation this parameter determines the outcome of the Frequency Mode 1 setting at powerdown or stop Changeable During Run No Settings Store Erase If Store is selected the ASD will maintain the current frequency setpoint in memory while stopped during fault conditions or when power is removed This setpoint will be used as the initial frequency setpoint when the ASD is restarted If Erase is selected the ASD will not store the frequency setpoint and establishes a setpoint of 0 0 Hz when restarted A control terminal configured as MOP Frequency Clear will establish a frequency setpoint of 0 0 Hz regardless of the Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down setting H7 ASD Operation Manual 61 F110 F114 ON Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment ON This parameter selects the functionality of the virtual input terminal ON As a virtual terminal the ON control terminal exists only in memor
107. Hz Display Units for Voltage and Current Program Utility Parameters gt Display Units This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI Settings V A Direct Access Number F701 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Changeable During Run Yes Hz Per User defined Unit Program Utility Parameters Display Units This parameter allows the user to input a quantity to be displayed on the EOI that is proportional to the output frequency of the drive This feature is useful when the output of a process is moved along at a rate that is proportional to the output frequency of the drive H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F702 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 0 Units Hz UDU 165 F703 F720 Frequency Display Resolution Program Utility Parameters gt Display Units The parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed during non Accel Decel functions Direct Access Number F703 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 0 01 Accel Decel Special Display Resolution Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for Accel Decel functions Direct A
108. LSB of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 6 S2 Preset Speed Command 2 is used as the second bit of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 7 S3 Preset Speed Command 3 is used as the third bit of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 8 S4 Preset Speed Command 4 is used as MSB of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 9 Jog Jog is the term used to describe turning on the motor for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor driven equipment is required This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of activation The Jog settings may be configured at F260 and F261 10 Emergency Off Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake The braking method may be selected at F603 11 DC Braking The drive outputs a DC current that is injected into the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor 12 Accel Decel 1 2 Switching Acceleration and Deceleration control may be switched from the 1 profile to the 2 profile during a multiple accel decel profile configuration by connecting this terminal to CC 13 Accel Decel 3 4 Switching Acceleration and Deceleration control may be switched from the 3 profile to the 4 profile during a multiple accel decel profile configuration by connecting this terminal to CC 14 Motor 1 2 Switching Mo
109. Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds Decel 3 Time Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 3 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the deceleration time 140 Direct Access Number F511 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F512 F515 Accel Decel Pattern 3 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 3 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 Direct Access Number F512 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes Accel Decel Switching Frequency 2 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 2 profile to the Accel 3 profile
110. Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number Fundamental Parameters Maximum Frequency F011 Upper Limit F012 Frequency Setting Lower Limit F013 V f Pattern F015 Command Mode F003 Frequency Mode 1 F004 Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode 2 F207 Reference Priority Selection F200 Mode 1 2 Switching Frequency F208 Accel 1 F009 Decel 1 F010 Accel Decel 1 Settings Accel Decel Pattern F502 Automatic Accel Decel Enable Disable F000 1 Base Frequency F014 1 Max Output Voltage F306 Motor Set 1 1 Torque Boost F016 1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600 Startup Wizard See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg 27 N A Changed from Default See the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg 26 N A Direct Access See the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 48 N A EOI Option Setups Darker highlight Darker and press Enter N A Contrast adjustment Lighter highlight Lighter and press Enter N A Command N A Local Remote Key Frequency N A Realtime Clock Setup Date and time setting requires RTC option N A Double Click Speed N A Arrow Speed N A Preferences Encoder Speed N A Pressed Encoder Action N A 34 H7 ASD Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Feinde EOI Option Setups Overheat Alarm N A Undervoltage Alarm N A Over current Alar
111. Negative Torque Limit 1 Selection F442 Torque Limit Settings Manual Settings F441 Torque Limit Mode F450 Torque Limit Mode speed dependent F451 40 H7 ASD Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Torque Setting Parameters 1 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F441 Manual Torque Limit 2 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F444 Settings 3 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F446 4 Positive Negative Torque Limit Settings F448 Torque Command Mode Selection F429 Forward Speed Limit Input Selection F425 Forward Speed Limit Level F426 Reverse Speed Limit Input Selection F427 Torque Speed Limiting Reverse Speed Limit Level F428 Speed Limit Torque 0 Reference Selection F430 Speed Limit Torque 0 Level F431 Speed Limit Torque 0 Band F432 Speed Limit Torque 0 Recovery Time F433 Feedback Parameters Input Selection F360 Proportional P Gain F362 Integral 1 Gain F363 Feedback Settings Differential D Gain F366 Delay Filter F361 Deviation Limits F364 Position Difference Limit F631 Number of PG Input Pulses F367 PG Input Phases F368 PG Disconnection Detection Selection F369 Electronic Gear Setting F370 Position Loop Gain F371 Positioning Completion Range F372 PG Settings Frequency Limit at Position F373 Current Contro
112. Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Autotune Disabled Changeable During Run No Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load A higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load ASD output ratio 122 Direct Access Number F401 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 60 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 55 H7 ASD Operation Manual F402 F410 Motor Constant 1 primary resistance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is the measurement of the stator resistance and is considered a Motor Constant unchanging This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor To use Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving the Motor Constant setting motor tuning is required Direct Access Number F402 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 000 MQ Units Q Motor Constant 2 secondary resistance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is the measurement of the rotor resistance and is considered a Motor Constant unchanging This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor This setting is used to maximi
113. Press the Run key and the motor runs at the Frequency Command value Note The speed of the motor may be changed while the motor is running by using the Rotary Encoder to change the Frequency Command value Press the StoplReset key to stop the motor Figure 19 Frequency Command screen FREQUENCY COMMAND Output Current 0 00 Forward ASD Load 0 00 H7 ASD Operation Manual 25 26 Default Setting Changes To change a default parameter setting go to the root of the Program menu and turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block and press the Rotary Encoder repeat if there is a submenu Press the Rotary Encoder to select the default setting to be changed and the selection takes on the reverse video format dark background light text Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the value of the parameter Press the ESC key before accepting the change to exit the menu without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting For a complete listing of the Program mode menu options see the section titled Program Mode on pg 34 Menu items are listed and mapped for convenience The Direct Access Numbers are listed where applicable The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed at the Direct Access menu Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number A listing of the Direct Access Numbers and a d
114. R This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RR input level and motor load See F210 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of F210 This value is entered as 0 250 of the rated torque H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F214 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 250 0 Units 89 F2 15 F215 90 RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RR input level and motor load See F210 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of F212 This value is entered as 0 250 of the rated torque Direct Access Number F215 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run
115. Rx Tx 4 Rx Tx 4 Gnd Gnd 5 Rx Tx 5 Tx Rx 6 Tx Rx 6 Gnd Gnd 7 RS232 485 CNU3 Pin 7 T Open Open 8 Gnd Gnd 8 Gnd Gnd Note See the 7 Series Communications Manual P N 53840 for further information on the H7 communications protocol and system configuration requirements H7 ASD Operation Manual Circuit Configurations Figure 7 Discrete input Figure 8 RR Input P24 P5 v P A Sn p 7k ag 560 0 18k 10k E i 15k 1 Input 01 pF 1K A 01 mpedance 53 us ERN Configured Sink may be configured Source Figure 9 RX Input Figure 10 VI II input 25 560 18k 10k Voltage T a 1k 33k Tm EM RX Conversion m 01 wf Ti ue Circuit 4 15k V 4 69k E Input 01 uf Impedance V S000 91 9 9 75 75 75 4 Inpedence VI end inputs may not be used simultaneously Figure 11 P24 Output Figure 12 PP Output 24 m P
116. Setting Direct Access Number F588 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 4 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 4 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Ch ngektle Dane RNG Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 5 Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F589 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 5 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 5 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Chailg able During No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual 151 F590 F593 Pattern Run 6 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 6 This parameter sets the run time value for the 6 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F590 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 7 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 7 This parameter sets the run time value for the 7 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F591 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units
117. TOSHIBA H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Operation Manual Document Number 52854 001 Date April 2003 Ww About This Manual This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group This group is tasked with providing technical documentation for the H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Every effort has been made to provide accurate and concise information to you our customer Email your comments questions or concerns about this publication to Jay Williams TIC TOSHIBA COM Contacting Toshiba s Customer Support Center Toshiba s Customer Support Center can be contacted to obtain help in resolving any H7 Adjustable Speed Drive system problem that you may experience or to provide application information The center is open from 8 a m to 5 p m CST Monday through Friday The Support Center s toll free number is US 800 231 1412 Fax 713 466 8773 Canada 800 527 1204 You may also contact Toshiba by writing to Toshiba International Corporation 13131 West Little York Road Houston Texas 77041 9990 Attn ASD Product Manager For further information on Toshiba s products and services please visit our website at TIC TOSHIBA COM TOSHIBA is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation All other product or trade references appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners The information in this manual is subject to change without notice Toshiba International Corporation
118. Table 15 460 Volt Drive Cable Terminal Specifications Circuit Typical Cable Size AWG Lug Size Model Breaker m VT130H7U Rating i ju AM FM and II Control Terminal ASD Input Output Power Amps Size Terminals Strip Lug Wire Capacity 4015 15 14 4025 15 14 4035 15 14 8 to 24 AWG 4055 15 14 4080 30 14 4110 30 14 4160 40 10 4220 50 10 4270 70 8 4to 18 4330 90 8 20 18 4400 Hu 0 3 core shield 2 core shield 4500 100 4 4600 125 3 14 to 1 0 4750A 175 2 410KA 200 1 412KA 225 2 0 415 300 4 0 6 to 250 420KA 350 2 0 425KA 400 4 0 430 600 300 435KA 700 400 Note Indicates that the is one of a set of two parallel cables 206 Appendix E H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 16 600 Volt Drive Cable Terminal Specifications Circuit Typical Cable Size AWG Lug Size Model Breaker Input Output VT130H7U Rating Power Wire AM FM and II Control Terminal ASD Input Output Power Amps Size Terminals Strip Lug Wire Capacity 6015 15 14 6025 15 14 6035 15 14 6060 15 14 8 to 24 AWG 6080 20 14 6120 30 14 6160 35 12 6220 50 10 6270 60 10 6330 70 10 he ie 3 shield 2 core shield 18 2 14 2 6400 90 8 6500 100 6 6600 100 6 6750 125 4 610K 175 3 612K 200 1 6 250
119. The S6 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S6 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S6 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 S7 Input Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F121 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment S7 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the S7 input terminal Changeable During Run No Note The S7 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S7 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable 7 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 64 H7 ASD Operation Manual F122 F124 Input 12 Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F122 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Typ
120. The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter On Condition On Delay Time is SOON ie Contacts Close Direct Access Number F150 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT2 On Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUT2 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT2 A amp C output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Direct Access Number F151 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS FL On Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays FL This parameter delays the closing of the FL output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Direct Access Number F152 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUTA On Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUTA This parameter delays the closing of the OUT4 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter 74 Direct Access Numb
121. Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 250 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual F216 F216 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the RX input terminal e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode 1 gt Use RX e Provide a Run command F or R Gain and Bias Settings When operating in the Speed Control mode the settings that determine the direction gain and bias of the RX terminal are RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F217 the RX input signal level that represents RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F216 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F219 and the RX input signal level that represents RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F218 When operating in the Torque Control mode the settings that determine the direction gain and bias of the RX terminal are Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F220 e the RX input signal level that represents the RX Torque Referen
122. a the easy to use menu or via the Direct Access Numbers see pg 48 This feature combined with Toshiba s high performance software delivers unparalleled motor control and reliability The H7 software functions is a very powerful tool yet surprisingly simple to operate The H7 has an easy to read 240 x 64 pixel graphical LCD screen with a user friendly Electronic Operator Interface EOI The EOI provides easy access to the many monitoring and programming features of the H7 The motor control software is menu driven which allows for easy access to the motor control parameters and quick changes when required To maximize the abilities of your new H7 a working familiarity with this manual will be required This manual has been prepared for the H7 ASD installer user and maintenance personnel This manual may also be used as a reference guide or for training With this in mind use this manual to develop a system familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device H7 ASD Operation Manual 1 DANGER DANGER Safety Precautions Rotating shafts and electrical equipment can be hazardous Installation operation and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel only Qualified Personnel shall be e Familiar with the construction and function of the ASD the equipment being driven and the hazards involved e Trained and authorized to safely clear faults ground and tag circuits energize and de energize circuits
123. able During Run Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 12 Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F596 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 12 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 12 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Rin zi Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 13 Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F597 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 13 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 13 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual 153 F598 F601 Pattern Run 14 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 14 This parameter sets the run time value for the 14 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F598 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 15 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 15 This parameter sets the run time value for the 15 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run Direct Access Number F599 Parameter
124. ach connection to CC 25 Forced Jog Forward This setting initiates a Forced Forward Jog when connected to CC The Forced Forward Jog command provides a forward run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC the status of the F and R terminals is ignored Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method 26 Forced Jog Reverse This setting initiates a Forced Reverse Jog when connected to CC The Forced Reverse Jog command provides a reverse run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC the status of the F and R terminals is ignored Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method H7 ASD Operation Manual 67 Table 6 Continued Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 27 Binary Bit 0 Bit 0 7 may be set up as a speed torque control register Speed torque settings may be applied to this group of terminals in binary form The required number of input terminals should be set to the respective binary bit settings 0 MSB The FMOD setting must be set to Use Binary BCD input The gain and bias of the binary input may be set from the following path Program Frequency Setting Parameters gt Speed Reference Setpoints BIN see F228 28 Binary Bit 1 See selection 27 above 29 Binary Bit 2 See selection 27 above 30 Binary Bit 3 See selection 27 above 31 B
125. acteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 15 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F584 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern Run 1 Run Time Setting Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 1 This parameter sets the run time value for the 1 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run 150 Direct Access Number F585 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F586 F589 Pattern Run 2 Continuation Mode Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F586 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 2 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 2 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Cliageable Dating Riv No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 3 Run Time Setting Direct Access Number F587 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 3 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the run time value for the 3 Preset Speed mode when Factory Default 5 used as part of a Pattern Run Changeable Dorme No Minimum 1 Maximum 8000 Units Seconds Pattern Run 4 Run Time
126. al Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz PG Speed Reference Setpoint 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt PG This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the PG input terminal when it is used as the Speed Direction Control input See F234 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference Setpoint 1 direction speed The range of values for this parameter is 100 to 100 of the PG input pulse count range Direct Access Number F236 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units PG Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints 2 PG This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the PG input terminal when it is used as the Speed Direction Control input See F234 for further information on this setting This parameter sets PG Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F236 Direct Access Number F237 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz Startup Frequency Program gt Special Control Param
127. al Selection Parameters Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch to commercial power criteria has been met OUT1 G7 Commercial Power gt s2 x Switch to commercial power command H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F357 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 62 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum drive dependent Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds 115 F358 F362 Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to commercial power is maintained once the switch to drive output criteria has been met Direct Access Number F358 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 10 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Feedback Source Program Feedback Parameters Feedback Settings This parameter Enables Disables PID feedback control When enabled this parameter determines the source of the motor control feedback Settings PID Control Disabled RR RX RX2 option Proportional Integral Derivative PID A closed loop control technique that seeks error minimization by reacting to three va
128. al system powerup the Startup Wizard starts automatically The Startup Wizard assists the user with the initial configuration of the input power settings and the output parameters of the H7 ASD The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the individual parameters see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 48 The Startup Wizard querys the user for the following information 1 CON AAA 11 Run now if selected continue on to step 2 Run next time at power up if selected go to Program Mode Manually configure if selected go to Finish gt Program Mode The Voltage and Frequency rating of the motor The Upper Limit frequency The Lower Limit frequency Adjust Accel Decel times automatically if Yes continue from step 8 The Acceleration time The Deceleration Time The Volts Hertz setting The motor Current rating The Command source The Frequency Reference source See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg 27 for additional information on the Startup Wizard Operation Local Note See F003 for information on Remote operation To turn the motor on perform the following Pm Press the MON PRG key until the Frequency Command screen is displayed see Figure 19 Press the LocallRemote key to enter the Local mode green Local LED illuminates Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise until the Frequency Command value is at the desired setting
129. al to CC allows for the frequency control to be switched from the frequency command source selected as Frequency Mode 1 to Frequency Mode 2 This function is enabled by setting the Reference Priority Selection to Frequency Source Priority Switching and is located at Program gt Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection Reference Priority Selection gt Frequency Source Priority Switching 53 VI II Terminal Priority Connecting this terminal to CC assigns speed control to the VI II Terminal and overrides all other Control Terminal Strip input so long as the Command Mode is set to Use Control Terminal Strip 54 Command Control Terminal Strip Priority Connecting this terminal to CC assigns speed control to the Control Terminal Strip 55 Parameter Editing Enabling LED The LED Keypad system is unavailable at the time of this release 56 Control Switch torque position This function allows for a system change from speed to torque or position as a function of the V f setting when connected to CC 57 Deviation Counter Clear This function clears the Deviation Counter when operating in the Position Control mode 58 Position Control Forward Limit LS Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its position If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip This function is normally used for over travel conditions 59 Position Con
130. am Communication Setting Parameters Scan Receive Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 5 Scan Receive Direct Access Number F835 Program Communication Setting Parameters gt Scan Receive Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 6 Scan Receive Direct Access Number F836 Program Communication Setting Parameters gt Scan Receive Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 1 Scan Transmit Direct Access Number F841 Program Communication Setting Parameters Scan Transmit Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 2 Scan Transmit Direct Access Number F842 Program Communication Setting Parameters Scan Transmit Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 3 Scan Transmit Direct Access Number F843 Program Communication Setting Paramete
131. ameter sets BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F230 Direct Access Number F231 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints BIN This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given BIN binary input and motor load See F228 for further information on this setting This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque 98 Direct Access Number F232 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual F233 F234 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints BIN This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given BIN binary input an
132. ameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 3 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps V A or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than Direct Access Number F177 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Motor 4 Base Frequency Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Maximum Output Voltage is set at F179 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 4 are configured and selected Motor set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the name plated frequency of the motor Direct Access Number F178 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 400 0 Units Hz Motor 4 Max Output Voltage Program
133. an the Upper Limit Frequency but lower than the Maximum Frequency when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Note This setting may not be higher than the Maximum Frequency F011 setting Direct Access Number F012 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Lower Limit Frequency Program Fundamental Parameters Frequency Settings This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop Frequencies below the Lower Limit may also be output when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback 52 Direct Access Number F013 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F014 F015 Motor 1 Base Frequency Program Fundamental Parameters Motor Set 1 The Base Frequency setting determines the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The maximum voltage setting cannot be more that the input voltage see Maximum Output Voltage
134. and bias of the VI II terminals are VII Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F202 the VI II input signal level that represents VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F201 VII Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F204 and the VI II input signal level that represents VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F203 When operating in the Torque Control mode the settings that determine the gain and bias of the VI II terminals are Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F205 the VI II input signal level that represents the VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 1 90 F201 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F206 the VI II input signal level that represents Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F203 Once set as the VI II input changes the output frequency or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the VI II input level that represents VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 1 torque or frequency This value is entered as 0 100 of the VI II input signal range The input signal may be trimmed using F470 Bias and F471 Gain The default value for this parameter F201 is 20 The II input is commonly used for the 4 20 mA current loop signal where 4 mA equals 2096 of a 20 mA signal If the VI input is used 0 10 VDC input parameter F201 may be changed to 0 0 of the input signal 84 Direct Access Number F201 Param
135. ane Hoist Load 45 46 Cumulative Run Timer 40 Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting 158 Current Control Integral Gain 119 Current Control Proportional Gain 119 Current Voltage Specifications 203 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency 80 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage 81 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Frequency 81 Custom V f Five Point Setting 2 Voltage 81 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency 81 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage 81 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency 82 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage 82 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency 82 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage 82 Customer Support Center 2 D Date and time setting 34 DC Braking 39 DC Injection Braking Current 102 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency 102 DC Injection Braking Time 102 DCL Selection Table 208 Dead Time Compensation 46 Decel 1 Time 52 Decel 2 Time 137 H7 Operation Manual Decel 3 Time 140 Decel 4 Time 141 Deceleration Time Adjustment 162 Default Setting Changes 26 Default Term Setting 11 Direct Access 34 Direct Access Parameter Information 48 Direct Access Parameters Numbers 48 Direction of motor rotation 51 Display Units 35 Display Units for Voltage and Current 165 Disposal 5 Down Key 23 Drive Capacity 22 Drive Characteristics 22 Driving 129 Driving Torque Limit 1 129 Driving Torque Limit 2 129 Driving T
136. angeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency setting establishes the frequency that is to be associated with the voltage setting of F191 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage The V f five point settings total 10 define a custom volts per hertz relationship for the startup output of the ASD To enable this function set the V f Pattern F015 selection to Custom V f Curve Custom V f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary drum vacuum filters Output Voltage C2 F199 F197 F195 F193 FAO Output Frequency Hz g Ql Y 5 c Boa Buses 80 Direct Access Number F190 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 400 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F191 F195 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage Direct Access Number F191 Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical The Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Voltage establishes the percentage of Factory Default 0 00 the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F190 Custom V f Five Point Setting 1 Frequency Changeable During Run No See F
137. anual F166 F172 OUT7 Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUT7 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT7 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT7 to respond Direct Access Number F166 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS Motor 2 Base Frequency Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The 2 Maximum Output Voltage is set at F171 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 2 are configured and selected Motor set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the name plated frequency of the motor Direct Access Number F170 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 400 0 Units Hz Motor 2 Max Output Voltage Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 2 output voltage at the Base Frequency F170 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual o
138. areas where vibration heat humidity dust metal particles or high levels of electrical noise EMI are present e Do not install the ASD where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gasses water solvents or other fluids e Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock to personnel and to help reduce electrical noise The input output and control power cables are to be run separately and each shall have its own ground cable Note Conduit is not an acceptable ground e Ensure that the 3 phase input power is Not connected to the output of the ASD This will destroy the ASD and may cause injury to personnel e Do Not connect resistors across terminals PA PC or PO PC This may cause a fire e Do not install the ASD if it is damaged or if it is missing any component s e Turn the power on only after attaching the front cover H7 ASD Operation Manual It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to setup the Emergency Off braking system of the ASD The function of the Emergency Off braking function is to remove output power from the drive in the event of an emergency A supplemental braking system may also be engaged in the event of an emergency For further information on braking systems see DC Injection Braking Start Frequency on pg 102 and Dynamic Braking Enable on pg 110 Note A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD Emergency st
139. ated below Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode Preset Speed S4 S1 d Ms S y LSB 1 0 0 0 1 018 setting 2 0 0 1 0 019 setting 3 0 0 1 1 F020 setting 4 0 1 0 0 F021 setting 5 0 1 0 1 F022 setting 6 0 1 1 0 F023 setting 7 0 1 1 1 F024 setting Note 1 Terminal connected to CC Presets 1 7 are shown but may continue to Preset Speed 15 H7 ASD Operation Manual 55 F019 F022 Preset Speed 2 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 2 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is identified as Preset Speed 2 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F019 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 3 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0011 and is identified as Preset Speed 3 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F020 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lo
140. aximum 200 0 Units mS OUTA Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUTA This parameter delays the opening of the OUTA output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUTA to respond Direct Access Number F163 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT5 Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT5 This parameter delays the opening of the OUTS output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUTS to respond Direct Access Number F164 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT6 Off Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays gt OUT6 This parameter delays the opening of the OUT6 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F160 The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT6 to respond 76 Direct Access Number F165 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS H7 ASD Operation M
141. ay be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F118 RR The default setting for this terminal is RR The function of this input as RR is to receive a 0 10 VDC input signal that controls a 0 80 Hz output This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor Also the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted see F210 F213 RX The default setting for this terminal is RX The function of this input as RX is to receive a 10 VDC input that controls a 80 Hz output This input may be programmed to control the speed torque or the direction of the motor Also the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted see F216 F219 II The function of the II input is to receive a 4 20 mA input signal that controls a 0 80 Hz output This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and may not be used when using the VI input Also the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted see F201 F204 H7 ASD Operation Manual VI The function of the VI input terminal is to receive a 0 10 VDC input signal that controls a 0 80 Hz output This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and may not be used when using the II input Also the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted see F201 F204 P24 24 VDC 50 mA power supply for customer u
142. be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S4 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F118 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Emergency Off Changeable During Run No 63 F119 F121 S5 Input Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F119 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment S5 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the S5 input terminal Changeable During Run No Note The 85 input terminal be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S5 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable 85 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 S6 Input Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F120 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment S6 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the S6 input terminal Changeable During Run No Note
143. ber 1011 and is Factory Default 0 00 identified as Preset Speed 11 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further Changeable During Run Yes information on this parameter Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual 107 F291 F294 Preset Speed 12 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds 12 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1100 and is identified as Preset Speed 12 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F291 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 13 Program Pattern Run Control gt Preset Speeds 13 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1101 and is identified as Preset Speed 13 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F292 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 14
144. cally Yes If Automatic Accel Decel is not enabled the Acceleration screen will appear followed by the Deceleration screen as shown below Acceleration Time Wizard Acceleration Time What is your acceleration time Volts per Hertz Setting This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage Settings Constant Torque Variable Torque Automatic Torque Boost Sensorless Vector Control Speed Automatic Torque Boost Automatic Energy Savings Deceleration Time Wizard Deceleration Time What is your deceleration time Wizard Volts Hertz What type of volts hertz control do you want Constant Torque Sensorless Vector Control Speed Automatic Energy Savings V f 5 point Setting Opens 5 point Setting Screen Sensorless Vector Control Speed Torque Switching PG Feedback Vector Control Speed Torque Switching PG Feedback Vector Control Speed Position Switching Motor Current Rating This parameter allows the user to input the full load amperage FLA of the motor This value is used by the ASD to determine the Thermal Overload protection setting for the motor and may be found on the nameplate of the motor 28 Wizard Motor Current What is the rated current of your motor 5 00 A H7 ASD Operation Manual Command Source This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Run commands e g F R Stop e
145. ccess Number F704 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 0 01 Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters gt Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization This parameter Enables Disables the ability to initialize user parameters during a Type Form initialization Settings Allowed Prohibited Direct Access Number F709 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Allowed Changeable During Run Yes V f Group No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option 1 of 4 V f groups may be selected and run Each V f group is comprised of 4 user defined variables Base Frequency Base Frequency Voltage Manual Torque Boost and Electronic Thermal Protection Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in this section Direct Access Parameter Information Note If using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter 166 Direct Access Number F720 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F721 F729 Stop Pattern No path available Direct Access Only While operating using the LED Keypad Option the Stop Pattern parameter determines the method used to stop the
146. ce Setpoint 1 F216 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F221 and the RX input signal level that represents the RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F218 Once set as the RX input voltage changes the directional information the output frequency or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the RX input level that represents RX Reference Setpoint 1 direction torque frequency This value is entered as 100 to 100 of the 10 to 10 VDC RX input signal range The input signal may be trimmed using F474 Bias and F475 Gain H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F216 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings Fefg Setpoint 2 Setpoint 1 001 G7 Output Frequency Fale Setpoint 2 Hz Fel7 Setpoint 1 Hz Torque Settings Felg Setpoint 2 Col ox t Setpoint 1 CO Fel6 m 250 je G7 Dutput Torque Feel Setpoint 2 torque F220 Setpoint 1 torque 91 F217 F220 RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of th
147. cess Number F304 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Overvoltage Stall Program Protection Parameters Stall This parameter Enables Disables the Overvoltage Stall function When enabled this function causes the drive to extend the decel time when the DC bus voltage increases due to transient voltage spikes regeneration supply voltage out of specification etc in an attempt to reduce the bus voltage Settings Enabled Disabled Enabled Forced Shorted Deceleration Direct Access Number F305 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run Yes Motor 1 Max Output Voltage Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 1 This parameter sets the maximum value of the output voltage of the drive The Motor 1 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor 1 output voltage at the Base Frequency F014 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 110 Direct Access Number F306 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts H7 ASD Operation Manual F307 F311 Supply Voltage Compensation Program Protection Parameters Base Frequ
148. ch for the speed of the rotor See F301 and F312 for additional information on this parameter Settings Normal Start from 0 0 Hz Start from Running Frequency Option Board ASD SS PG Direct Access Number F314 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Normal Changeable During Run No Search Inertia Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart After a momentary power loss or the momentary loss of the ST to CC connection this parameter sets the time for the commanded torque to reach its programmed setting during the automatic restart This function is in effect so long as the Retry Restart feature is enabled at F301 Settings 0 5 Sec fast 1 0 Sec standard 1 5 Sec 2 0 Sec 2 5 Sec 3 0 Sec 3 5 Sec 4 0 Sec 4 5 Sec 5 0 Sec slow 112 Direct Access Number F315 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run No Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual F320 F323 Drooping Gain Direct Access Number F320 Program Feedback Parameters gt Drooping Control Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the effective 10096 output torque level while operating in Factory Default 0 00 the Drooping Control mode This value is the upper torque limit of the motor being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Drooping Drooping Control
149. crolled automatically The display time for each selected item may be set from 1 to 60 seconds The parameters that may be displayed on the Scrolling Monitor are listed in the section titled Monitor Mode on pg 32 H7 ASD Operation Manual Panel Menu The Panel menu may be accessed in either of two ways while operating using the LED Keypad Option the Panel menu may be accessed via F008 or if operating in the Local mode using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access the Panel menu The control settings of the Panel menu are effective for the LED keypad only if accessed via the Direct Access method and are effective for the LCD EOI only if accessed via the Frequency Command screen Changes made to either of the Panel menus are not carried over to the other Panel menu Using either method provides quick access to the following Panel menu parameters Direction Forward or Reverse see F008 for further information on this setting Stop Pattern The Decel Stop or Coast Stop settings determines the method used to stop the motor when using the StopIReset key of the EOI The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system setup at F250 F251 and F252 The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load Note The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603 V f Group 1 of 4 V f profiles ma
150. d Ensure that the motor is The load requirements are properly matched to the in excess of what the motor application can deliver OLR DBR Overload This trip is caused by an Deceleration time is too Extend the deceleration Trip excessive current at the short time Dynamic Braking DBR configuration ncrease the capacity of Resistor improperly set the DBR and the setting at F309 Ensure that the DBR is appropriately sized for the application OP1 Overvoltage This fault is caused by an The ASD is attempting to Setthe Ridethrough mode Accel overvoltage condition start a running motor after a F302 to Off during acceleration momentary power loss The incoming utility power level is above the specified range Ensure that the incoming utility power is within normal operating parameters Make a service call if the failure persists H7 ASD Operation Manual 185 EOI Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action Display 2 Overvoltage This fault is caused by an The decel time is too short e Extend the decel time Decel overvoltage condition The DBR resistance value is setting during deceleration too high F308 Decrease the DBR value The DBR function is turned Install a DBR and enable off the DBR feature The Overvoltage Stall Enable the Overvoltage feature is turned off Stall feature The incoming utility power Install an inpu
151. d at FLA De energized UB Direct Access Number F132 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Fault Changeable During Run No Output 4 Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment 4 This parameter sets the functionality of the output 4 terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the 4 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed 70 Direct Access Number F133 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default LL Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F134 F140 Output 5 Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment 5 This parameter sets the functionality of the output 5 terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the 5 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F134 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default UL Changeable During Run No Output 6 T
152. d motor load See F232 for further information on this setting This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque Direct Access Number F233 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units PG Speed Reference Setpoint 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints 2 PG This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the PG input terminal when it is used as the Speed Direction control input The PG input signal is a pulse count originating from a shaft mounted Encoder Note The PG input terminal may be used with the ASD Multicom option board only Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive a binary control input e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode any setting e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt Use Pulse Input Option e Provide a Run command F or R The settings that determine the direction gain and bias of the PG input are Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F235 e the PG input pulse count that represents PG Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F234 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F237 and e the PG input pulse count that represents PG Speed Reference Setpoin
153. d or the driven equipment All H7 ASDs are equipped with internal DC bus fuses However not all H7 ASDs are equipped with internal primary power input fuses HP dependent When connecting two or more drives that have no internal fuse to the same power line as shown in Figure 2 it will be necessary to select a circuit breaking configuration that will ensure that if a short circuit occurs in ASD 1 only MCCB2 trips not If it is not feasible to use this configuration insert a fuse between MCCB2 and ASD 1 Figure 2 Circuit breaker configuration Breaking Fused MCCBe 5 8 o SD 1 AC IN MCCB3 eee 9 o is o o o o MCCBn S o H7 ASD Operation Manual 7 Mounting the ASD Caution Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes on the rear of the ASD When replacing an H3 ASD with a H7 ASD see Appendix B on pg 196 for a listing of the optional H3 to H7 Adapter Mounting Plates The ambient temperature rating for the H7 is from 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C The process of converting AC to DC and then back to AC produces heat During normal ASD operation up to 5 of the input energy to the ASD may be dissipated as heat If installing the ASD in a cabinet ensure that there is adequate ventilation Do Not operate the ASD with the enclosure door open When installing multiple ASDs ensure that t
154. d the 6 flat washers 5 Connect the RJ 45 extension cable s EOI Dimensions mounting Figure 31 EOI Mounting Dimensions 3 72 0 22 lt 4 338 o38 KJ We E UN L Reor side Hole 3 80 3 34 3 56 dod 3 00 0 12 gieszt e 2 42 fol 3 94 EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD MTG KIT Note See Figures 32 and 33 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 6 1 At the EOI mounting location identify and mark the locations of the 5 00 by 4 60 hole and the four 11 32 screw holes 2 Cut the 5 00 by 4 60 rectangular hole 3 Drill the four 11 32 holes 4 Attach and secure the Bezel plate to the front side of the mounting location using the four 10 32 hex nuts 10 split lock washers and the 10 flat washers 5 Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the Bezel plate using the four 6 32 x 5 16 pan head screws 6 split lock washers and the 6 flat washers 6 Connect the RJ 45 extension cable s H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix C 201 EOI ASD MTG KIT Dimensions mounting Figure 32 EOI Bezel Plate Mounting Dimensions Mounting Hole 11 32 Screw Hole 4
155. during a multiple acceleration profile configuration Direct Access Number F513 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Accel 4 Time Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 4 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Direct Access Number F514 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Decel 4 Time Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 4 Deceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the decelerati
156. e Selection List Assignment S12 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the 12 input terminal Changeable During No Note The S12 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S12 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 12 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Input 13 Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F123 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment S13 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the 13 input terminal Changeable During Run No Note The S13 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S13 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 13 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table
157. e Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Number F851 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 Receive Address Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Number F860 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Transmit Address Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Number F861 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Speed Reference Station Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Number F862 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Speed Reference Address Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Numbe
158. e ASD configuration is correct Record the Vector Motor Model settings before performing the Autotune and then perform the Autotune Upon completion press Escape to exit the Autotune screen and allow for a screen refresh Return to the Vector Motor Model settings and ensure that the values have changed If the values have not changed then the Autotune function was aborted uncompleted because of one or more of the aforementioned reasons Make a service call if the failure persists ETYP ASD Typeform This fault occurs when the The Gate Driver board has See Program gt Utility Error firmware information been replaced Parameters Versions typeform loaded into the The Gate Driver board is and confirm that the Gate Driver board is defective correct device type inconsistent with the device appears in the first field in which the firmware is Replace the Gate Driver being used board and ensure that the new board has been programmed with the correct typeform information INIT Parameter is This display provides an The user accesses a Under indication that a user parameter during the Initialization selected parameter is being initialization of the selected initialized parameter MOFF Main Circuit This fault is caused by an Low input voltage If the utility line voltage Undervoltage undervoltage condition at is within acceptable the 3 phase AC input to the limits make a service ASD call
159. e During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F813 F821 Communications Reference Setpoint 2 Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input See F811 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 frequency This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the Communications Reference input value range Direct Access Number F813 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Communications Speed Setpoint 2 frequency Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input See F811 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 Direct Access Number F814 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RS485 Baud Rate Program Communication Setting Parameters 2 Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS485 baud rate
160. e FM analog output terminal To calibrate the FM analog output connect a meter current or voltage as described at F005 With the drive running at a known frequency adjust this parameter F006 until the running frequency produces the desired DC level output at the FM terminal H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F006 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 1280 49 Table 5 Output terminals AM FM FP and Analog 1 amp 2 assignment selections Function 0 Output Frequency FM and FP default setting 1 Frequency Reference 2 Output Current AM default setting 3 DC Bus Voltage 4 Output Voltage Analog 1 default setting 5 Post compensation Frequency Analog 2 default setting 6 Speed Feedback realtime 7 Speed Feedback 1 sec filter 8 Torque 9 Torque Command 10 Internal Torque Base 11 Torque Current 12 Excitation Current 13 PID Feedback Value 14 Motor Overload Ratio 15 ASD Overload Ratio 16 PBR Overload Ratio 17 PBR Load Ratio 18 Input Power 19 Output Power 20 Peak Output Current 21 Peak DC Bus Voltage 22 PG Counter 23 Position Pulse 24 RR Input 25 Input 26 RX Input 27 RX2 Input 28 FM Output used for factory testing only 29 AM Output used for factory testing only 30 Meter Adjust Value 31 Analog Output
161. e RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F216 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F216 Direct Access Number F217 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode See F216 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the RX input level that represents RX Reference Setpoint 2 frequency direction torque frequency The range of values for this parameter is 100 to 100 of the 10 to 10 VDC RX input signal range Direct Access Number F218 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as th
162. e control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F216 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F218 Direct Access Number F219 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints RX This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX input level and motor load See F216 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of F216 This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque 92 Direct Access Number F220 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual F221 F221 RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Direct Access Number F221 Program Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints RX Parameter Type Numerical This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias
163. e input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 15 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Input 16 Terminal Assignment Direct Access Number F126 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Parameter Type Selection List Assignment S16 Factory Default Unassigned This parameter selects the functionality of the 16 input terminal Changeable During Run No Note The S16 input terminal may be used without the ASD Multicom option board Without the ASD Multicom option board the S16 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable terminal 16 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 66 H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 6 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions 0 Unassigned No operation 1 F Enables the Forward operation command 2 R Enables the Reverse operation command 3 ST Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands maybe disabled at F103 4 RES Resets the device and any incurred faults 5 1 Preset Speed Command 1 is used as the
164. e negative torque upper limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single Changeable During Run Yes motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Torque Limit Mode Direct Access Number F450 Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Limit Settings Parameter Type Selection List Torque Limit Mode Factory Default Driving Regen Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During No Settings Driving Regen Positive Negative Torque Limit Mode Speed Dependent Direct Access Number F451 Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Limit Settings Parameter Type Selection List Torque Limit Mode Speed Dependent Factory Default Standard This parameter allows for either wide or very limited speed fluctuations while operating in the Torque Control mode Changeable During Run Yes The ASD output follows the commanded speed when No Speed Cooperation is selected and has a very limited speed fluctuation range when Standard is selected Settings Standard No Speed Cooperation Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation Direct Access Number F452 Program Protection Parameters Stall gt Continuing Stall Period Parameter Type Numerical This parameter allows the user to extend the Overvoltage Stall F305 and the Factory Default 0 0 Overcurrent Stal
165. ea P24 Fuse PP 10 VDC output Voltoge 24 VDC TRUM Transfer 100 mA TOi uf Wma oF A v 01 yf Max V Fuse resets after high current is removed Figure 13 OUT1 OUT2 Output Figure 14 FP Output P24 PS Programmable poc M P5 Input 2A 250VAC H e r qii i Y re E 2 E EE 1 to i32 A t2 J PNEU xs FEES 1 i LU Y Figure 15 AM FM Output Figure 16 Fault Relay During Fault P24 2A 250VAC m FLB 47k Low Pass 14 250VAC AM FM Filter p 9 HO Circuit FLC ii Programmable 10 VDC 24 24 250VAC Input Mox o1 ae 1 mA P Max V L I V H7 ASD Operation Manual 17 18 Typical Connection Diagram Default Terminal Assignments Figure 17 H7 typical connection diagram Potentiometer Note When connecting multiple wires to the PA PB PC or PO terminals do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the same terminal High K ptionoD Voltage De Reactor Remove the jumper if installing a a DC reactor DCL 4 DBR Function is not DBR available on all device types po PA PB High t Vol
166. eature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 485 Communication Card Motorized Pot Pulse Input 1 Direct Access Number F660 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Frequency Override Multiplying Input Program Feedback Parameters gt Override Control This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Output Frequency If operating using the LED Keypad Option and Setting is selected the value entered at F729 is used as the multiplier Settings Disabled RR RX RX2 option Setting LED Keypad Option Only H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F661 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 163 F670 F674 AM Terminal Assignment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt AM This setting determines the output function of the AM analog output terminal This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output te
167. ed as 100 to 100 of the 10 to 10 VDC RX2 input signal range Direct Access Number F224 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F222 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F224 Direct Access Number F225 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters Setpoints RX2 This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX2 input level and motor load See F222 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the sett
168. ed to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting Toshiba s Customer Support for assistance e What is the ASD Motor size e 15 this a new installation e the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications e Does the ASD trip when accelerating running decelerating or when not running e Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency e Does the ASD trip without the motor attached e Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor Viewing Trip Information When a trip occurs error information may be viewed either from the Trip History screen Program gt Monitor Setup Trip History the Trip Monitor From ASD screen Program Monitor Setup gt Trip Monitor From ASD or from the Monitor screen Trip History The Trip History screen records the at trip system parameters for up to 101 trips RTC option required The recorded trips are numbered from zero to 100 Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 100 H7 ASD Operation Manual 177 the oldest recorded trip will be deleted with each new record stored first in first out The Trip field may be selected and scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number The monitored at trip parameters are listed in Table 8 on pg 178 as At trip Recorded Parameters Trip records zero and one are comprised of the full list of monitored parameters listed in Table 8 Trip
169. eds This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Group 3 will be run 0 254 or Infinite Direct Access Number F550 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 1 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F551 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 2 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F552 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 146 Direct Access Number F553 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 3 Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F554 F562 Group 3 Speed 4 Direct Access Number F554 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed 5 Direct Access Number F555 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run
170. ee F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Minimum 0 0 Maximum 400 Units Hz Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage Direct Access Number F195 Program Special Control Parameters Five Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical The Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Voltage establishes the percentage of Factory Default 0 0 the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F194 Custom V f Five Point Setting 3 Frequency Changeable During Run No See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual 81 F196 F199 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequency sets the frequency to be associated with parameter F197 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F196 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 400 Units Hz Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F196 Custom V f Five Point Setting 4 Frequenc
171. ency F174 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 3 are configured and selected Motor set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F175 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts Motor 3 Torque Boost Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 3 Base Frequency setting F174 See parameter F016 Motor 1 Torque Boost for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 3 are configured and selected Motor set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal 78 Direct Access Number F176 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units 46 H7 ASD Operation Manual F177 F180 Electronic Thermal Protection 3 Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Electronic Thermal Protection par
172. ency Voltage This parameter Enables Disables the Voltage Compensation function This function provides an output waveform adjustment that compensates for changes in the input voltage Direct Access Number F307 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run No Dynamic Braking Resistance Program Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking Resistor if so equipped For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given application contact Toshiba s Marketing Department Note Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system damage Direct Access Number F308 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 0 Maximum 1000 0 Units Q Dynamic Braking Resistance Capacity Program Protection Parameters Dynamic Braking This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor if so equipped For additional information on selecting the proper resistor wattage value for a given application contact Toshiba s Marketing Department Note Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result in system damage Direct Access Number F309 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum
173. er F153 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS H7 ASD Operation Manual F154 F160 OUT5 On Delay Direct Access Number F154 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUT5 Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the closing of the OUTS output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 Changeable During Run No The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT6 On Delay Direct Access Number F155 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUT6 Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT6 output terminals by the t programmed value see waveforms at F150 Changeable During Run No The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS OUT7 On Delay Direct Access Number F156 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical OUT7 Factory Default 2 0 This parameter delays the closing of the OUT7 output terminals by the programmed value see waveforms at F150 Changeable During Run No The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units
174. er ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Settings No Parity Even Parity Odd Parity Direct Access Number F801 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Even Parity Changeable During Run Yes ASD Number Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by assigning an identification ID number to each ASD in the communications network The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Direct Access Number F802 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 RS485 Communications Time Out Time RS485 Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by setting the time that no activity may exist over the communications link before the link is severed Time Out The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD 168 Direct Access Number F803 Parameter Type
175. erating in the Speed Control mode See F228 for further information on this setting This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F228 Direct Access Number F229 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 80 0 Units Hz BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode See F228 for further information on this setting This parameter sets BIN Reference Setpoint 2 direction torque frequency and is entered as 0 to 100 of the BIN binary input word 11111111 255p Direct Access Number F230 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F228 for further information on this setting This par
176. ere the more pronounced quicker the effect of the integral function Direct Access Number F377 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 200 0 Motor Counter Data Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F378 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Selection 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum Selection 0 Maximum Selection 5 Speed Loop Parameter Ratio Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F379 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 00 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Use Speed Mode Program Pattern Run Control Parameters gt Preset Speed Mode This parameter Enables Disables the Use Speed mode When enabled the system uses all of the parameter settings of the Preset Speed being run Otherwise only the frequency setting is used Direct Access Number F380 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Preset Speed Direction 1 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds Determines the forward reverse setting for the 1 Preset Speed F018 Direct Access Number F38
177. erminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment 6 This parameter sets the functionality of the output 6 terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the 6 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F135 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RCH Specified Speed Changeable During Run No Output 7 Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment 7 This parameter sets the functionality of the output 7 terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the 7 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F136 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Overcurrent Prealarm Changeable During Run No F Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays gt F This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal input by the progra
178. ern 1 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 1 In conjunction with the setting of F585 this parameter is used to set the run time of Preset Speed 1 when used as part of a Pattern Run Settings Time From Start Time From Reach No Limit Until Next Step 148 Direct Access Number F570 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F571 F578 Pattern 2 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 2 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F571 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 3 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 3 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F572 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 4 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 4 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F573 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 5 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Paramete
179. ersists Undervoltage This fault is caused by alow Low input voltage Ensure that the input Trip Main bus voltage Momentary power failure that voltage is within the Circuit lasted longer than the time established parameters setting of F628 so long as Set the Ridethrough mode F627 is enabled to Ridethrough F302 Enable F301 to allow for a restart after momentary power failure Increase the Undervoltage Detection time F628 UP2 Undervoltage This fault is caused by alow Low input voltage Ensure that the input Trip Control bus voltage Momentary power failure that voltage is within the Circuit lasted longer than the time established parameters setting of F628 so long as F627 is enabled Set the Ridethrough mode F302 to Ridethrough Enable F301 to allow for a restart after a momentary power failure Increase the Undervoltage Detection time F628 H7 ASD Operation Manual 187 Appendix A Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information H7 Part Numbering Convention Note vri30 uzu 4 otsk a Hous ton built Designator Series Identifier Voltage Fanily e 4 6 230 Volt Class 460 Volt Class 600 Volt Class KVA Rating are multiplied by 10 pr design upgrade f the lost character is K then the preceding two digits f all characters are numbers then this value is divided by 10 The Type 1 enclosed versions of these drives meet or exceed
180. escription of the associated parameter may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 48 A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by accessing the Changed From Default screen Program Changed From Default Note Parameter F201 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 20 The Changed From Default feature allows the user to view or change the parameters that are different from the default or the post reset settings Once the Changed From Default screen is displayed the system automatically scrolls through all of the system parameters and halts once reaching a changed parameter The Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue scrolling forward or clicked once counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse With each click of the Rotary Encoder from a stop the system scrolls through all of the parameters and stops at the next parameter that has been changed Pressing the Rotary Encoder while a changed parameter is displayed accesses the settings of the changed parameter for viewing or changing Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search Pressing ESC when done searching or halted at a changed parameter returns the system to the Program Menu Figure 20 Changed From Default screen Program Changed From Default Fundamental Parameters F201 VI II Reference Setti
181. etector Error output current of the ASD exceeds the established parameters for a given application or configuration ERR8 Option Device This fault is caused by a Defective option device Replace the defective Fault malfunction in one of the Option device is not option device ASD option devices connected securely Ensure that the Option device is not connections are correct configured correctly and secured Ensure that the option device is configured correctly ERR9 Flash Memory This fault is caused by Defective flash memory Make a service call Fault corrupted data in the flash source or destination memory location ROM or RAM H7 ASD Operation Manual 181 EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action ETN Autotuning Error This fault is caused by Autotune readings that are significantly inconsistent with the configuration information e 3 motor is being used Incorrect settings at F400 F413 or F414 Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD e ASD output cabling is too small too long or is being housed in a cable tray with other cables that are producing an interfering EMF Motor is running during the Autotune function Confirm that the possible causes listed above are not the cause for the error Check the nameplated information on the motor and ensure that th
182. eter Type Numerical Factory Default 20 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 096 Units Frequency Settings F803 Setpoint 2 ZI 20 mA 10075 Input Signal Setpoint 1 Col F201 0 0 wz fru Output Frequency F202 Setpoint 1 Hz Torque Settings 2 f Setpoint 2 CDI l l l Setpoint 1 Output Torque F205 F20 Setpoint 1 torque Setpoint 2 torque H7 ASD Operation Manual F202 F205 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency Direct Access Number F202 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Parameter Type Numerical Setpoints gt VIII Factory Default 0 0 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI II input terminals when either terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Changeable During Run Yes Control mode Minimum 0 0 See F201 for further information on this setting Maximum Max Freq F011 This parameter sets VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F201 Units Hz Speed Reference Setpoint 2 96 Direct Access Number F203 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Parameter Type
183. eters Vector Motor Model This parameter Enables Disables the Autotune function Direct Access Number F414 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Enable Changeable During Run No Torque Command Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control When operating in the Torque Control mode this parameter allows the user to select the source of the torque command signal Settings RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option Binary BCD Input Common Serial TTL RS232 485 Communication Card 124 Direct Access Number F420 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RX Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F421 F423 Torque Command Filter Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter reduces the motor vibration caused by large inertia loads A small value will have a great effect while an increased value will have a lesser effect Direct Access Number F421 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 200 0 Synchronized Torque Bias Input Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Synchronized Torque Bias input function When enabled this parameter identifies the source of the Synchronized Torque Bias input signal Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option LED Keypad Option
184. eters Frequency Control The output of the drive will remain at 0 0 Hz until the programmed speed value exceeds this setting during startup Once exceeded during startup the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting Output frequencies below the Startup Frequency will not be output from the drive during startup However once reaching the Startup Frequency speed values below the Startup Frequency may be output from the drive 100 Direct Access Number F240 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F241 F244 Run Frequency Program Special Control Parameters Frequency Control This parameter establishes a center frequency Run Frequency of a frequency band Parameter F242 provides a plus or minus value for the Run Frequency thus establishing a frequency band During acceleration the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached During deceleration the drive will continue to output the programmed deceleration output signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached at which time the output will go to 0 0 Hz Direct Access Number F241 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Run Freq
185. etting F198 5 Voltage Setting F199 V f Adjustment Coefficient F183 0 Hz Dead Band Frequency Setting Signal F244 0 Hz Command Stop Function F255 Over Exciting Cooperation F481 Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening 1 N A Special Parameters Zone Exciting Starting Rate N A Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss F487 Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time Dead Time Compensation Enable Disable F489 46 H7 ASD Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number Special Control Parameters Dead Time Compensation Bias F490 Switching Frequency Between Current and F490 Voltage Optional Analog Terminal Mark N A Current Differential Gain F454 Special Parameters Exciting Strengthening Coefficient F480 Enable Disable User Parameter Initialization SEND F709 During Typeform Initialization Current Vector Control F482 Voltage Vector Control F483 Constant Vector Control F484 H7 ASD Operation Manual 47 F000 F003 Direct Access Parameter Information The H7 ASD has the ability to allow the user direct access to the motor control functions The functions listed below have an associated Parameter Number which accesses its setting There are two ways in which the motor control parameters may be accessed for modification Progra
186. from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F141 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS ST Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays ST This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F142 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS RES Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays RES This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F143 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 1 S4 Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays 51 54 This parameter delays the response
187. from the Panel menu and the Frequency Command mode Note Panel menu changes made when accessing the Panel menu using the method shown in Figure 21 is effective for Local LCD EOI control Only Figure 21 Root menu mapping 1 1 1 Frequency Command MON PRG MON PRG MON PRG Monitor Mode Program Mode Mode 005 ESC ESC Panel Menu Used for LCD EDI Local Operation Only Frequency Command Mode Frequency Setting While operating in the Local mode Local LED is illuminated on the front panel the running frequency of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen Using the Rotary Encoder enter the Frequency Command value and then press the Run key The motor will run at the Frequency Command speed and may be changed while running Scrolling Monitor The Output Current and the ASD Load values are displayed below the Frequency Command parameter of the Frequency Command screen default setting Other user selected parameters may be displayed on this screen for quick access monitoring while running These parameters may be accessed and enabled for display by placing a check in the box next to the item listed at Program Monitor Setup Scrolling Monitor Select If no parameters are enabled for display No Items is displayed When more than two items are selected for display the items are s
188. he Analog 1 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of 31 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 5 on pg 50 Direct Access Number F672 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Voltage Changeable During Run Yes Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters Analog 1 This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the Analog 1 circuit to obtain an output that corresponds with a known input This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices DVM counters etc Direct Access Number F673 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 Analog 2 Terminal Setting Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters Analog 2 This parameter sets the Analog 2 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of 31 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 5 on pg 50 164 Direct Access Number F674 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Post compensation Frequency Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F675 F702 Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters Analog 2 This parameter adjusts the
189. he on off IGBT signal that feeds the Gate Driver board during the off portion of the on off cycle Settings Enabled Disabled Direct Access Number F489 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run Yes Dead time Compensation Bias Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters gt Dead time Compensation Bias This parameter sets a bias for the Dead time Compensation function The Dead time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on off IGBT signal that feeds the Gate Driver board Direct Access Number F490 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 000 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 32 768 Maximum 32 767 Switching Frequency of Current Voltage Control Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters gt Switching Frequency between Current and Voltage Control This parameter sets the threshold frequency at which ASD control is switched between Current control and Voltage control Direct Access Number F491 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 40 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 00 Maximum 60 00 Units Hz Accel 2 Time Program Special Control Parameters 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 2 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The
190. here is a clearance space of at least 8 inches 20 cm from the top and the bottom of adjacent units There should be at least 2 inches 5 cm on either side of adjacent units For the models below 50 HP the top and bottom clearance specifications may be reduced to 4 inches 10 cm This space ensures that adequate ventilation is provided see the section titled Enclosure Dimensions Weight on pg 188 for additional information on mounting space requirements Note Ensure that the ventilation openings are not obstructed ASDs produce high frequency noise steps must be taken during installation to avoid the negative effects of noise Listed below are some examples of measures that will help to combat noise problems e Separate the input and output power conductors of the main circuit Do not install the input and output wires in the same duct or in parallel with each other and do not bind them together Do not install the input or output power conductors of the main circuit and the wires of the control circuit in the same duct or in parallel with each other and do not bind them together e Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuits e Ensure that the grounding terminals G E of the ASD are securely connected to ground e Connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay installed near the ASD e Install noise filters as required Connecting the ASD DANGER Refer to the section titled I
191. his parameter provides slight increases in the output voltage of the drive at the high speed range This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F410 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 650 0 123 F411 F420 Number of Poles of Motor Program Motor Parameters Motor Settings This parameter identifies the number of motor poles Direct Access Number F411 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 Maximum 16 Motor Capacity Program Motor Parameters Motor Settings This parameter identifies the wattage rating of the motor Direct Access Number F412 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 10 Maximum drive dependent Units kW Motor Type Program Motor Parameters Motor Settings This parameter identifies the type of motor being used Settings Toshiba EQP III TEFC Toshiba EQP III ODP Toshiba EPACT TEFC Toshiba EPACT ODP Other Motor Direct Access Number F413 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Toshiba EQP III TEFC Changeable During Run No Allow Autotune Program Motor Param
192. ias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD Direct Access Number F476 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 99 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RX2 Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 gt Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F477 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 141 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 Exciting Strengthening Coefficient P
193. ime Changeable During Run Yes Settings None Small Medium Large The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal With no filtering applied the digital value from the conversion is scaled for use by the microprocessor of the ASD If the filtering selection is Small the ASD averages the last 5 sampled digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 uS and scaled for use by the microprocessor If the filtering selection is Medium the ASD averages the last 20 sampled digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 and scaled for use by the microprocessor If the filtering selection is Large the ASD averages the last 50 sampled digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 and scaled for use by the microprocessor False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth because the value used by the drive is the average value of several samples H7 ASD Operation Manual 87 F2 10 F210 88 RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the RR terminal e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode
194. inary Bit 4 See selection 27 above 32 Binary Bit 5 See selection 27 above 33 Binary Bit 6 See selection 27 above 34 Binary Bit 7 See selection 27 above 35 Forced Stop Activating this terminal terminates the Run command regardless of the CMOD setting and initiates the programmed stopping method 36 Stop Key Emulation Activating this terminal terminates the Run command being received from communications devices and initiates the programmed stopping method 37 Reserved No operation 38 Reserved No operation 39 Reserved No operation 40 Reserved No operation 4 Reserved No operation 42 Reserved No operation 43 Binary Data Write While operating in the Use Binary BCD input mode each momentary connection of this terminal and CC transfers the speed torque Binary Bit 0 MSB settings to the motor 44 Motorized Pot Up MOP Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes an increase in motor speed for the duration of the connection until the Upper Limit is reached The FMOD setting must be set to Motorized Pot Simulation The MOP acceleration rate is determined by the F500 setting 45 Motorized Pot Down MOP Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes a decrease in motor speed for the duration of the connection until the Lower Limit is reached The FMOD setting
195. ing Control 102 Motor Shaft Stationary Control 103 Motor Type 124 Motor Load Combinations 20 Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down 61 Motorized Pot Settings 38 Mounting the ASD 8 219 N Number of PG Input Pulses 117 Number of Poles of Motor 124 Number of Retries 109 O OL Reduction Starting Frequency 156 ON Input Terminal Assignment 62 On Trip Powerline Switching 114 Operation Local 25 Operation Above 60 Hz 20 Option Type 33 OUTI 11 13 OUT Off Delay 75 OUT On Delay 74 Out1 Out2 FL 32 OUT Output Terminal Assignment 70 OUT2 11 13 OUT2 Off Delay 76 OUT2 On Delay 74 OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment 70 OUT4 Off Delay 76 OUT4 On Delay 74 OUTS Off Delay 76 OUTS On Delay 75 OUT 6 Off Delay 76 OUT6 On Delay 75 OUT7 Off Delay 77 OUT7 On Delay 75 Output 4 Terminal Assignment 70 Output 5 Terminal Assignment 71 Output 6 Terminal Assignment 71 Output 7 Terminal Assignment 71 Output Phase Loss Detection 155 Output Terminal Assignments 72 Output Terminal Delays 37 Output Terminals 36 Overcurrent Protection 22 Overcurrent Stall Level 154 Overload 39 Overload Protection 19 Override Control 42 Overspeed Detection Frequency Range 159 Overtorque Detection Time 158 OverTorque Settings 40 Overtorque Trip 157 Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Negative Torque 158 Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Positive Torque 158 Overvoltage Stall 110 Overvoltage S
196. ing of F222 This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F226 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units 95 F227 F227 96 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Setpoints gt RX2 This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX2 input level and motor load See F222 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of F224 This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque Direct Access Number F227 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 0 Maximum 250 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual F228 F228 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt BIN This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals when these terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or
197. inish Upper Limit Frequency This parameter sets the highest frequency that the H7 will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The H7 may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Wizard Upper Limit Frequency What is your upper limit frequency Frequency but lower than the Maximum Frequency 60 Hz when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Lower Limit Frequency This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the H7 will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The H7 will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Woar Ue unte Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop Frequencies below the Lower Limit may be output when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Wizard Min Frequency H7 ASD Operation Manual 27 Adjust Accel Decel Automatically When enabled the H7 adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according to the applied load The acceleration and deceleration times range from 12 5 to 800 of the programmed values for the active acceleration time e g Acceleration Time 1 F009 and Deceleration Time 1 F010 The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel Decel Wizard Accel Decel Do you want the drive to adjust accel decel times automati
198. ion Braking Time Program Protection Parameters DC Braking This parameter is used to set the on time duration of the DC Injection Braking Direct Access Number F252 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Motor Shaft Fixing Control Program Protection Parameters DC Braking This parameter determines if DC Injection braking is to be used during a change in the direction of the motor 102 Direct Access Number F253 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F254 F255 Motor Shaft Stationary Control Direct Access Number F254 Program Protection Parameters DC Braking Parameter Type Check Box This parameter Enables Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the Factory Default Disabled amperage setting of F251 into a stopped motor This feature is useful in preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely Changeable During Run Yes Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the motor and continues until ST CC is opened power is turned off receiving an Emergency Off command or this parameter is changed Enabling this feature will also require a non zero entry at F250 0 Hz Command Function Direct Access Number F255 Program Special Control Parameters
199. iption User defined Preset Speeds are labeled 1 15 see F018 The ID number of any one of the fifteen frequencies 1 15 may be entered into the Speed field of the Pattern Run screen and run for the number of times entered into the Repeat field see F530 The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this manner is called a Pattern Run Skip may be selected to ignore a Speed field Pattern Run Setup 1 Configure an unused discrete input terminal for Pattern 1 2 3 or 4 This terminal will initiate the selected Pattern Run The input terminal settings may be configured via Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminals see Table 6 on pg 67 for available input terminal settings Enable the Pattern Run mode of operation via Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Pattern Run Enable Disable check box Configure the Preset Speeds that are to be used as the Group Speed set of frequencies via Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds e g Preset Speed 1 on pg 55 Configure the Group Speeds by associating the Preset Speeds that are to be enabled and grouped from step 3 as Group Speed 1 2 3 or 4 via Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Set the Repeat field to the number of times that the selected group is to be run Set unused speed settings to Skip From the Remote mode LocallRemote light is off initiate a Run command e g F and or R terminal On
200. ire obligation of Toshiba International Corporation The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba International Corporation s ASD Division and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation will void all warranties and may void the UL CUL listing or other safety certifications Unauthorized modifications may also result in equipment damage or personal injury This Manual s Purpose and Scope This manual provides information that will assist the qualified installer in the safe installation setup operation and disposal of the H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive The information provided in this manual is applicable to the H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive only This operation manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost saving device including e Installation e System operation e Configuration and menu options and e Mechanical and electrical specifications Table of Contents IntrodUCtOI iie EEA E TE E E E T E EE E 1 DK Y 2 Installation Precautions rar Re eu te 2 Maintenance Precautions 4 service Life Information eere c 4
201. isables the feature that allows for the external Factory Default Disabled adjustment of the Base Frequency When enabled either VI II or RR may be used as an input source for the modification of the Base Frequency setting Changeable During Run Yes Settings Disabled VIAL RR Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment Direct Access Number F651 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Analog Input Functions Parameter Type Selection List This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external Factory Default Disabled adjustment of the Upper Limit When enabled either VI II or RR may be used as an input source for the modification of the Upper Limit setting Changeable During Run Yes Settings Disabled VIAL RR H7 ASD Operation Manual 161 F652 F654 Acceleration Time Adjustment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Analog Input Functions This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Acceleration Time Selecting either VI II or RR enables this feature The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Acceleration Time setting The multiplication factor may be from 1 to 10 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Settings Disabled RR Direct Access Number F652 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During R
202. it 1 if Setting is selected at F442 Direct Access Number F443 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Driving Torque Limit 2 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F444 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 46 129 F445 F448 Regeneration Torque Limit 2 Program Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F445 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Driving Torque Limit 3 Program Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or
203. it is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity 2 minimum 214 Appendix H H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 24 600 Volt 3 0 300 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing MODEL NUMBER PCB Part Numbers 48048 48698 48700 48776 49500 50001 51580 52266 VT130H7U C etc PCB Typeform 6035 6060 6080 6120 6160 6220 6270 6330 6400 6500 6600 6750 610K 612K 615K 620K 625K 630K cm oc a 52266 52266 52266 52266 52266 52266 rl cl A Al A 52266 al ay al al a w wj w w w gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt j gt w w w w w w w w w w w w w 52266 The following PCBs are common to the above listed typeforms Control Terminal Strip PCB 48570A 4 20 mA PCB 50611A Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix H 215 Index Numerics 0 Hz Command Function 103 0 Hz Dead Band Signal 101 A Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time 159 Abnormal Speed Settings 40 Acc Dec Base Frequency Adjustment 161 Acc Dec Group 139 Acc Dec Switching Frequency 1 139 Accel 1 Time 51 Accel 2 Time 136
204. itching relationship 13 FLB 11 13 FLC 11 13 FM 11 13 44 FM Terminal Adjustment 49 FM Terminal Assignment 49 Forward Speed Limit Input 126 Forward Speed Limit Level 126 FP 11 13 FP Terminal Adjustment 165 FP Terminal Setting 165 FP Terminal Settings 37 Frequency Command screen 25 Frequency Control 45 Frequency Display Resolution 166 Frequency Mode 1 49 Frequency Mode 2 34 86 Frequency Override Additive Input 163 Frequency Override Multiplying Input 163 Frequency Reference Source 29 Frequency Set Mode 30 Frequency Setting 34 Frequency Setting Parameters 38 Fundamental Parameters 34 Fwd Rev Disable 38 G Group 1 Speed 1 144 Group 1 Speed 2 144 Group 1 Speed 3 144 Group 1 Speed 4 144 218 Group 1 Speed 5 144 Group 1 Speed 6 145 Group 1 Speed 7 145 Group 1 Speed 8 145 Group 1 Speed Repeat Factor 144 Group 2 Speed 1 145 Group 2 Speed 2 145 Group 2 Speed 3 145 Group 2 Speed 4 145 Group 2 Speed 5 146 Group 2 Speed 6 146 Group 2 Speed 7 146 Group 2 Speed 8 146 Group 2 Speed Repeat Factor 145 Group 3 Speed 1 146 Group 3 Speed 2 146 Group 3 Speed 3 146 Group 3 Speed 4 147 Group 3 Speed 5 147 Group 3 Speed 6 147 Group 3 Speed 7 147 Group 3 Speed 8 147 Group 3 Speed Repeat Factor 146 Group 4 Speed 1 147 Group 4 Speed 2 147 Group 4 Speed 3 148 Group 4 Speed 4 148 Group 4 Speed 5 148 Gro
205. l F017 time settings Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 1 00 Units Seconds H7 ASD Operation Manual 131 F453 F471 Stall Prevention During Regeneration Program Protection Parameters Stall Stall Prevention During Regeneration This parameter Enables Disables the Overvoltage Stall F305 and the Overcurrent Stall F017 function during regeneration only Application specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall function during regeneration Settings With Stall Prevention Without Stall Prevention Direct Access Number F453 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default With Stall Prevention Changeable During Run Yes Current Differential Gain Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Current Differential Gain This parameter determines the degree that the current differential function affects the output signal The larger the value entered here the more pronounced the Current Differential Gain Direct Access Number F454 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 23 Changeable During Run Yes VI Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints VI II gt Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the VI II input terminals Note See note on pg 33 for further information on the VI II terminal This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level
206. l Functions Parameter Type Selection List This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input Factory Default Disabled signals to control the ASD when received via the Control Terminal Strip even though the system is in the Local mode Changeable During Run No With this parameter enabled a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking command received from the Control Terminal Strip will receive priority over commands from the EOI See F260 for further information on using the Jog function See F250 F252 for further information on DC Injection Braking Settings Enabled Disabled 60 H7 ASD Operation Manual F107 F108 Extended Terminal Function Direct Access Number F107 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List The Extended Terminal Function is used with the optional ASD Multicom Factory Default None card only This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when using the option card Changeable During Run No Settings None 12 Bit Binary 16 Bit Binary 3 Digit BCD 4 Digit BCD Reverse 12 Bit Binary Reverse 16 Bit Binary Reverse 3 Digit BCD Reverse 4 Digit BCD Selections using 16 bit binary or 4 digit BCD will require the configuration of terminals S1 S4 on the Control Terminal Strip as binary bits 0 3 F115 F118 The Frequency Mode 1 Selection F004 must be set to Use Binary BCD Input
207. l Parameter Type Numerical Parameters Factory Default 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Minimum 0 Maximum 0 Optional Parameter 2 Direct Access Number F891 Program gt Communication Setting Parameters Optional Parameter Type Numerical Parameters Factory Default 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter M Minimum 0 Maximum 0 Optional Parameter 3 Direct Access Number F892 Program Communication Setting Parameters gt Optional Parameter Type Numerical Parameters Factory Default 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter m Minimum 0 Maximum 0 Optional Parameter 4 Direct Access Number F893 Program Communication Setting Parameters Optional Parameter Type Numerical Parameters Factory Default 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Minimum 0 Maximum 0 H7 ASD Operation Manual 175 F894 F894 Optional Parameter 5 Program Communication Setting Parameters Optional Parameters Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter 176 Direct Access Number F894 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Minimum 0 Maximum 0 H7 ASD Operation Manual Alarms Faults Trips and Troubleshooting Alarms Faults and Trips Thi
208. l Proportional Gain F374 Current Control Integral Gain F375 Speed Loop Proportional Gain F376 Speed Loop Integral Gain F377 Motor Counter Data Selection F378 Speed Loop Parameter Ratio F379 Drooping Control Drooping Gain 100 F320 H7 ASD Operation Manual 41 Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Feedback Parameters Speed at Drooping Gain 0 F321 Speed at Drooping Gain 100 F322 Drooping Insensitive Torque Band F323 Drooping Control Drooping Output Filter F324 Drooping Reference F327 Load Inertia Acc Dec Torque F325 Load Torque Filter F326 Adding Input Selection F660 Override Control Multiplying Input Selection F661 LED Option Override Multiplication Gain F729 Pattern Run Control Pattern Run Mode Enable Disable and Restart Parameters Pattern Rin Configuration duc Pattern 1 Speeds F530 Pattern 2 Speeds F540 Speeds Pattern 3 Speeds F550 Pattern 4 Speeds F560 1 Frequency amp Characteristics F018 2 Frequency amp Characteristics F019 3 Frequency amp Characteristics F020 4 Frequency amp Characteristics F021 5 Frequency amp Characteristics F022 6 Frequency amp Characteristics F023 7 Frequency amp Characteristics F024 Preset Speeds 8 Frequency amp Characteristics F287 9 Frequency amp Characteristics F288 10 Frequency amp Characteristics F289 11 Frequency a
209. l signal for the positive torque limit setting If Setting is selected the value set at F441 is used as the Power Running Torque Limit 1 input Settings RR RX RX2 option Setting 128 Direct Access Number F440 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Setting Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F441 F444 Driving Torque Limit 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit 1 setting if Setting is selected at F440 This value provides the positive torque upper limit for the 1 motor Direct Access Number F441 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 46 Regeneration Torque Limit 1 Program Torque Setting Parameters gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit control signal If Setting is selected the value set at F443 is used for this parameter Settings VI I RR RX RX2 option Setting Direct Access Number F442 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Setting Changeable During Run Yes Regeneration Torque Limit Setting 1 Program gt Torque Setting Parameters Torque Limit Settings Manual Settings This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Lim
210. ld 0 254 or forever by selecting Infinite Running multiple Preset Speeds as a group is called a Pattern Run This parameter allows the user to run the Preset Speeds 1 15 as a group and is identified as Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore a Preset Speed entry See F520 for further information on this setting Direct Access Number F531 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 2 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F532 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 3 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F533 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 3 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 4 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F534 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 4 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 5 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 144 Direct Access Number F535 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 5 Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F536 F544 Gro
211. ltage Output Voltage Output Current Overload VT130H7U KVA HP Kw 3 Ph 50 60 3 Ph Variable 100 Current 120 for 2 2 Frequency Continuous 60 Secs 4055 5 50 5 00 3 73 7 6 9 1 A 4080 8 00 7 50 5 60 11 0 A 13 2 A 4110 11 0 10 0 7 46 14 0 A 16 8 A 4160 16 0 15 0 11 2 21 0 A 25 2 A 4220 22 0 20 0 14 9 27 0 A 32 4 A 4270 27 0 25 0 18 6 34 0 A 40 8 A 4330 33 0 30 0 22 4 42 0 A 50 4 A 4400 40 0 40 0 30 0 52 0 A 62 4 A 4500 50 0 50 0 37 0 380 480 VAC Input Voltage 65 0 A 78 0 A 4600 60 0 60 0 45 0 10 Level Max 77 0 A 92 4 A 4750A 75 0 75 0 55 0 96 0A 115 2A 410KA 100 0 100 75 0 124 0 A 148 8 412KA 125 0 125 90 0 156 0 A 187 2A 415KA 150 0 150 110 190 0 A 228 0 A 420KA 200 0 200 150 240 0 A 288 0 A 425KA 250 0 250 185 302 0 A 362 4 A 430KA 300 0 300 220 370 0 A 444 0 A 435KA 350 0 350 280 450 0 A 540 0 A H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix D 203 Table 13 600 Volt NEMA Type 1 Chassis standard ratings table In Vol Vol rren verl Model Rated Motor put Voltage Output tage Output eu ent Ove pad 3 Ph 50 60 3 Ph Variable 100 Current 120 for VT130H7U KVA HP Kw z 2 Hz Frequency Continuous 60 Secs 6035 3 50 3 00 2 24 4 00 A 4 8 A 6060 6 00 5 00 3 73 6 1A 73A 495 600 VAC 6080 8 00 7 50 5 60 45 10 9 0A 10 8 A 6120 12 0 10 0 7 46 12 0A 14 4 A 6160 16 0 15 0 11 2 17 0A 20 4 A 6220 22 0 20 0 14 9 220A 26 4 A
212. ltage levels This section discusses the ASD control methods and supported I O functions The Control Terminal Strip supports discrete and analog I O functions and is shown in Figure 5 on pg 14 Table 2 lists the names the default settings and the descriptions of the input and output terminals of the Control Terminal Strip PWA Note To use the input control lines of the Control Terminal Strip the Command Mode setting must be set to Use Control Terminal Strip Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode gt Use Control Terminal Strip Figure 17 on pg 18 shows the basic connection diagram for the H7 system Table 2 Control Terminal Strip default assignment terminal names and functions Default Term Setting Input Output Default Function Circuit Config Standby jumper to CC to operate the unit Multifunctional ST Discrete Input programmable discrete input see Installation Notes on pg 6 for further information on this terminal RES Discrete Input Reset Multifunctional programmable discrete input F Discrete Input Forward Multifunctional programmable discrete input R Discrete Input Reverse Multifunctional programmable discrete input Figure 7 on pg 17 S1 Discrete Input Preset Speed 1 Multifunctional programmable discrete input S2 Discrete Input Preset Speed 2 Multifunctional programmable discrete input S3 Discrete Input P
213. lues One that is proportional to the error one that is representative of the error and one that is representative of the rate of change of the error Direct Access Number F360 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Control Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Feedback Source Delay Filter Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor control feedback signal signal source is selected at F360 Direct Access Number F361 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Proportional P Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings This parameter provides a value that either increases or decreases the degree that the Proportional function affects the output signal The larger the value entered here the quicker the drive responds to changes in feedback 116 Direct Access Number F362 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 H7 ASD Operation Manual F363 F367 Integral 1 Gain Program Feedback Parameters gt Feedback Settings This parameter provides a value that either increases or decreases the degree that the Integral function affects the output signal The smaller the value here the more pronounced the effect of the integral functio
214. m gt applicable menu or Program Direct Access applicable parameter number Both methods access the parameter via the Program mode Once accessed the parameter may be viewed or changed The Program mode allows the user to develop an application specific motor control profile Motor control functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given application The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user accessible Parameter Numbers are listed and described below Note The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the procedure Application specific settings may then be performed The pre Reset conditions may be saved see F007 The LED Keypad is under development and is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Parameters Numbers Automatic Accel Decel 1 Program Fundamental Parameters Accel Decel 1 Settings When enabled the ASD adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according to the applied load The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12 596 to 80096 of the programmed values for Acceleration Time 1 F009 and Deceleration Time 1 F010 Note The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel Decel Direct Access Number F000 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Not Selected Changeable During Run No Command Mode Selection
215. m N A ASD Overload Alarm N A Alarm Popups Motor Overload Alarm N A Timer N A Overtorque Alarm N A DBR Resistor Alarm N A Lockout Reset N A Lockout Monitor N A Lockout Run Stop N A Lockout Parameter Access N A Lockout Lockout Parameter Write N A Lockout Frequency Change N A Lockout Options N A Lockout Local Remote N A Enable Password N A Review Startup Screen displays the Startup screen N A Utility Parameters Typeform N A CPU Version N A CPU Revision N A Versions read only EEPROM 1 Version N A EEPROM 2 Version N A EOI Version N A User defined Units Enable Disable N A User defined Units N A Display Units Hz Per User defined Unit F702 Frequency Display Resolution F703 Units for Voltage and Current F701 None Auto Setup for 50 Hz Type Reset F007 Auto Setup for 60 Hz Restore Factory Defaults H7 ASD Operation Manual 35 Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Poen Utility Parameters Clear Trip Clear Run Timer New Base Drive Board Save User Parameters Type Reset F007 Restore User Parameters Reload EOI Flash Reset EOI Memory Comm Stops During Reset Terminal Selection F F111 Parameters R ST F113 RES F114 S1 F115 S2 F116 S3 F117 54 118 Input Terminal Function S5 F119 S6 F120 S7 F121 12 F122 13 F123 14 F124 15 F125 16 F126 ON F110 Out 1 F130 Out 2 F131
216. m will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range Direct Access Number F274 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 3 F274 Direct Access Number F275 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz Jump Frequency Processing Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency Processing This parameter determines if the output frequency of the ASD or the PID feedback signal will be used as a reference for determining the Jump Frequency range See F270 for further information on the Jump Frequency settings Settings Process Amount use PID feedback Output Frequency 106 Direct Access Number F276 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Process Amount Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F287 F290 Preset Speed 8 Direct Access Number F287 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 8 Parameter Type Numerical This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1000 and is Factory Default 0 00 identified as Preset Speed 8 The binary number
217. meter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F427 Direct Access Number F428 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Torque Command Mode Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting This parameter specifies whether the torque command function is to be used in one direction or both F R Settings Fixed Direction F R Permitted Direct Access Number F429 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Fixed Direction Changeable During Run No Speed Limit torque Reference Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable speed variance Settings None RR RX RX2 option Fixed H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F430 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Changeable During Run Yes 127 F431 F440 Speed Limit Torque Level Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque
218. mmed value Input Terminal Delay Time Input Terminal G7 Response The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F140 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 71 Table 7 Output Terminal Assignment Selections Function Function 0 Lower Limit LL 30 Forward Reverse Operation 1 Upper Limit UL 31 Ready for Operation including ST and RUN 2 Low speed setting of F100 32 Ready for Operation 3 RCH acc dec completion 33 POFF Alarm poor control power supply 4 RCH speed specified at F101 34 System Consistent Sequence BR brake release 5 Fault FL all 35 In Alarm Status 6 Fault FL except EF or OCL 36 Forward Speed Limit torque control 7 Overcurrent Pre alarm 37 Reverse Speed Limit torque control 8 ASD Overload Pre alarm 38 ASD Healthy Output 9 Motor Pre alarm 39 Abnormal Communication Alarm 2 internal cause 10 Overheat Pre alarm 40 Error Code Output 1 6 bit error output 11 Overvoltage Pre alarm 41 Error Code Output 2 6 bit error output 12 DC Voltage Low Alarm 42 Error Code Output 3 6 bit error output 13 Low current Alarm 43 Error Code Output 4 6 bit error o
219. mp Characteristics F290 12 Frequency amp Characteristics F291 13 Frequency amp Characteristics F292 14 Frequency amp Characteristics F293 15 Frequency amp Characteristics F294 Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable Disable F380 Communication Setting Inverter Number F802 Farameters Communication Settings Logic TTL Baud Rate F800 RS232 485 Baud Rate F820 42 H7 ASD Operation Manual Program Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Bonney Communication Setting Parity F801 RS232 485 Communication Time Time F803 RS232 485 Communication Time Out Action N A Logic TTL Communication Time Out Action F804 Communication Interval logic F805 Communication Settings RS232 485 Wire Count F821 RS232 485 Response Time F825 TTL Master Output Selection F806 RS232 485 Master Output Selection F826 LCD Port Connection Type N A ae Frequency Point Selection F810 Receive Address F860 Transmit Address F861 Speed Reference Station F862 Speed Reference Address F863 Torque Reference Station F865 S20 Settings Torque Reference Address F866 Fault Detect Station Number F868 Station Mode F869 S20 Reset F899 Error Mode F850 Error Detect Time F851 1 Scan Receive F831 2 Scan Receive F832 3 Scan Receive F833 Scan Receive Settings 4 Scan Receive F834 5 Scan Receive F835 6 Scan Receive
220. n 197 Appendix C otn tete ee INO connate nce URINE Teri seuss sess cunt It re E PORE INVE T IUe 200 FOLRemote MOUnUig e E Oi eiit pts 200 Remote EOI Required Hardware eese 200 EOI Installation Precautions wienn nnne enne ennemi nnne enne en 200 EOI Remote Mounting w o the ASD MTG KIT eee 201 EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD MTG KIT eee 201 Appendix TF 203 Current Voltage Specifications 2 ener 203 Appendix E eee ete tree eee er a epa Re DU us E Dee epo tes E depo Ie ena 205 Cable Terminal Specifications sess 205 uev EH 208 Link Reactor Information peers ER e e ege e wea is 208 Appendix cam D 210 H7 Optional Devices eet rei te aer Hn Re ke ex ere 210 Appendix H Des 211 H7 ASD Spare Parts Listings eee et etre 211 H7 Operation Manual Introduction Congratulations on the purchase of the new H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive ASD The H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive is a standard duty solid state AC drive that features True Torque Control2 TIC s Vector Control Algorithm enables the motor to develop high starting torque and provide compensation for motor slip which results in smooth quick starts and highly efficient operation The H7 uses digitally controlled pulse width modulation The programmable functions may be accessed vi
221. n DC Injection is used as a function of receiving an Emergency Off command F603 this parameter determines the time that the DC Injection braking is applied to the motor Direct Access Number F604 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Output Phase Loss Detection Program Protection Parameters gt Phase Loss This parameter Enables Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3 phase output signal U V or W of the ASD If either line is missing inactive or not of the specified level the ASD incurs a trip H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F605 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 155 F606 F610 OL Reduction Starting Frequency Program Protection Parameters Overload This parameter is used to reduce the start frequency during very low speed motor operation During very low speed operation the cooling efficiency of the motor decreases Lowering the start frequency aides in minimizing the generated heat Direct Access Number F606 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 6 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Motor 150 OL Time Limit Program Protection Parameters Overload This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150 of its rated c
222. n on the output signal Direct Access Number F363 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 Feedback Settings Upper Deviation Limits Program Feedback Parameters Feedback Settings This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may increase the output signal Direct Access Number F364 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units Feedback Settings Lower Deviation Limits Program Feedback Parameters Feedback Settings This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may decrease the output signal Direct Access Number F365 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 50 00 Units Feedback Settings Differential D Gain Program Feedback Parameters Feedback Settings This parameter determines the degree that the differential function affects the output signal The larger the value entered here the more pronounced the affect of the differential function for a given feedback signal level Direct Access Number F366 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 2 55 Number of PG Input Pulses Program Feedback Parameters PG Setti
223. nabled for automatic tuning configured manually at F400 or disabled The measured parameters include the rotor resistance the stator resistance the required excitation inductance rotational inertia values and leakage inductance values The H7 drive is also equipped with a factory loaded table of motor parameters that fit several different types of motors To use this function disable Autotune and select a motor type at F413 Pulse Width Modulation Operation The H7 ASD uses a sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation PWM control system The output current waveform generated by the drive approaches that of a perfect sine wave however the output waveform is slightly distorted For this reason the motor may produce more heat noise and vibration when operated by a drive rather than directly from commercial power Low Speed Operation Operating a general purpose motor at lower speeds may cause a decrease in the cooling ability of the motor Reducing the torque requirement of the motor at lower speeds will decrease the generated heat at lower speeds When the motor is to be operated at low speed less than 50 of full speed and at the rated torque continuously a Toshiba VF motor designed for use in conjunction with a drive is recommended When the drive is used with a VF motor the VF Motor overload protection setting must be enabled see Program Protection Parameters Overload V f Motor Enable Disable Overload Protection Adjus
224. nal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 5 on page 50 For further information on this terminal see F670 on pg 164 FM This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 5 on page 50 For further information on this terminal see F005 on pg 49 FLC FLC is the middle leg of a single pole double throw relay switch This FLC contact of the relay is switched between FLB and FLA This contact may be programmed to switch from FLB to FLA as a function of 1 of the 60 conditions listed in Table 7 on page 72 see F132 and Figure 4 FLB One of two contacts that under user defined conditions connect to FLC see Figure 4 FLA One of two contacts that under user defined conditions connect to FLC see Figure 4 Note The FLA and FLC contacts are rated at 24 250 VAC The FLB contact is rated at 1A 250 VAC CC Control common Do Not connect to Earth Gnd Figure 4 FLA FLB and FLC switching shown in the de energized state Note The relay is shown in the Faulted or de energized condition During FLC normal system operation the relay connection is FLC to FLA FLA O H7 ASD Operation Manual 13 Figure 5 Control Terminal Strip PWA SW1 and SW2 may be ma lt q SWE 4
225. nd Connections The H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up initially by performing a few simple configuration settings To operate properly the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to a power source 3 phase AC input at the L1 R L2 S and L3 T terminals The control terminals of the H7 may be used by connecting the terminals of the Control Terminal Strip to the proper sensors or signal input sources see the section titled I O and Control on pg 11 Note The optional ASD Multicom boards may be used to expand the functionality of the ASD See the section titled H7 Optional Devices on pg 210 for further information on the available options The output terminals of the ASD T1 U T2 V and T3 W must be connected to the motor that is to be controlled see Figure 17 on pg 18 Upon initial system powerup the Startup Wizard starts automatically The Startup Wizard assists the user with the initial configuration of the H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive See the section titled Initial Setup on pg 25 for additional information on the Startup Wizard As a minimum the installation of the ASD shall conform to Article 110 of the 2002 NEC the Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements and to any other local and regional industry codes and standards Installation Notes When a brake equipped motor is connected to the ASD it is possible that the brake may not release at startup because of in
226. ne the rotation speed of the rotor The low level signal will start scanning the motor at FH and decrease until it reaches 0 0 Hz or it matches the signal produced by the turning rotor Once the rate of rotation is determined the drive will provide the normal output to engage the motor from its present speed This parameter determines the rate at which the scanning signal goes from FH to 0 0 Hz See F301 for additional information on this parameter Direct Access Number F312 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 50 Maximum 2 50 Lock on Rate Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart After a momentary power outage the ASD may have to startup into a spinning motor The Lock On Rate is the difference between the time that the RPM of the motor is determined by the ASD and the time that the ASD outputs a drive signal to the motor See F301 for additional information on this parameter Direct Access Number F313 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 50 Maximum 2 50 Search Method Program Protection Parameters Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage this parameter may be used to set the starting point frequency of the scanning signal that is used to determine the rotor speed or this parameter may be used to select the method used to sear
227. ng Point 1 Startup Wizard 07D1 GoTo Direct Access EOI Option Setup Use arrows to view H7 ASD Operation Manual Startup Wizard Requirements The Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the input and output signal parameters of the ASD The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the control settings via the Program menu or the Direct Access Numbers see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 48 Upon initial system powerup the Startup Wizard starts automatically The user is queried to either 1 run the Startup Wizard Run Now 2 perform a manual setting of user selected parameters or 3 run the Startup Wizard at the next power up If selection 2 is chosen the system returns to the Program menu and defaults to the Startup Wizard on the next power up If selection 3 is chosen click the Finish box and the system returns to the Frequency Command screen If selection 1 Run Now is selected the Startup Wizard will start and assist the user with the configuration of the H7 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive using the following user input screens Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor Motors are designed and manufactured for a specific Wizard Motor Rating voltage and frequency range The voltage and frequency specifications for a given motor may be found on the 200v o0Hz nameplate of the motor 200V 230V 60Hz will configure manually F
228. ng will start DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with three phase motors Unlike conventional brakes there is no physical contact between the rotating shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum When braking is required the drive outputs a DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor The braking current stops when the time entered in F252 times out The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the motor will come to a stop and may be set at F251 The intensity setting is entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current into the motor at the Carrier Frequency This feature may be enabled at F254 Direct Access Number F250 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 120 0 Units Hz DC Injection Braking Current Program Protection Parameters DC Braking This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be used for DC Injection braking A larger load will require a higher setting Direct Access Number F251 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units DC Inject
229. ngs This parameter is used to set the end of travel range when using an encoder on a motor driven positioning system e g hoist crane etc H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F367 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 500 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 9999 Units Pulse Count 117 F368 F371 PG Input Phases Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase encoder Settings 1 Speed 2 Speed and Direction Direct Access Number F368 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2 Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Units Phase Count PG Disconnect Detection Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter Enables Disables the system s monitoring of the PG connection status when using encoders with line driver outputs Direct Access Number F369 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Electronic Gear Setting Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings This parameter sets the number of pulses per revolution when using a shaft mounted encoder and the PG Option Board for closed loop speed control Direct Access Number F370 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1000 Changeable During Run No Minimum 100 Maximum 4000
230. nnected to of the rated FLA on ASDs Deceleration time too short the motor correctly that are 100 HP or less Motor machine jammed ncrease the deceleration js MN Mechanical brake engaged ume 100 HP it occurs when the while the ASD is running Ensure that the system is 2 not jammed ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA during Adding a braking resistor across the PA and PB deceleration ji E terminals will reduce the overcurrent condition see F304 for further information on this function OC3 Overcurrent This fault occurs when the Load fluctuations Reduce or stabilize the Run ASD current exceeds 340 e ASD is operating at an load Ensure that the ASD is adequately ventilated see Mounting the ASD on pg 8 H7 ASD Operation Manual 183 EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action OCA 1 U V or W Phase This fault occurs in the Output resistance of the U Ensure that the ASD 2 or 3 Short Circuit event of a short circuit at the V or W leads of the ASD output and the motor are U 1 V 2 or W 3 are not within the connected correctly output leads of the ASD acceptable range e Disconnect the motor from the ASD and retry Replace the applicable IGBT U V or W Contact your Toshiba distributor for repair information OCL Motor This fault occurs when a Output resistance of the U Ensure tha
231. nsions 202 Bezel Mounting Hardware 200 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 6 97 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency 98 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 98 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency 98 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 98 BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 2 99 Brake Fault Internal Timer 160 Brake Fault Timer 40 Break Make Start 109 Cable Terminal Specifications 205 Carrier Frequency 45 CC 11 13 Changed from Default 34 Changed From Default screen 26 Circuit breaker configuration 7 Clearing a Trip 178 CN7 Pinout 15 Command Mode Selection 48 Command Source 29 H7 Operation Manual Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time 116 Commercial Power Wait Time 115 Common Serial TTL 15 Communication Baud Rate logic 168 Communication Error 44 172 Communication Internal 169 Communication Reference 170 Communication Reference Adjust 43 Communication Setting Parameters 42 Communication Settings 42 Communications Reference Setpoint 1 170 Communications Reference Setpoint 2 171 Communications Speed Setpoint 1 frequency 170 Communications Speed Setpoint 2 frequency 171 concerns about this publication 2 Conduit Extender Box 195 Conduit Plate Information 188 193 Configuration and Menu Options 30 Connecting the ASD 8 Connection Diagram 18 Contrast adjustment 34 Control Board 15 Control Terminal Strip 11 Cr
232. nstallation Precautions on pg 2 and the section titled Lead Length Specifications on pg 10 before attempting to connect the ASD and the motor to electrical power AN System Grounding Proper grounding helps to prevent electrical shock and to reduce electrical noise The ASD is designed to be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the 2002 NEC or Section 10 Part One of the Canadian Electrical Code CEC The grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Article 250 122 of the NEC or Part One Table 6 of the CEC Note The metal of conduit is not an acceptable ground The input output and control lines of the system shall be run in separate metal conduits and each shall have its own ground conductor 8 H7 ASD Operation Manual DANGER H7 ASD Operation Manual Power Connections L1 R L2 S and L3 T are the 3 phase input supply terminals for the ASD The ASD may be operated from a single phase supply When operating using a single phase supply use the L1 and L3 terminals T1 U T2 V and T3 W are the output terminals of ASD that connect to the motor An inductor may be connected across terminals PA and PO to provide additional filtering When not used a jumper is connected across these terminals see Figure 17 on pg 18 Connect the input and output power lines of the ASD as shown in Figure 3 Note In the event that the motor rotates in the wrong direction when powered up reverse any two of the three ASD output
233. nting plate dimensions PEM NUT 4 0 000 7 oe fo 0 313 D Co S ZO 2810 2 gt 45 0 X 0 079 4 8 468 d f 0 SL s8078 7 600 0 1405 2 p l l B i 0 868 O1 0 390 l 0 000 0 M In pss wo u 0 o zi o Qu 89 10 32 PEM NUT 4 0 000 NE Ta J 0 313 45 0 X 0 079 4 gt u a ZO0 2810 2 gt M 8 468 CL g Yl e078 4 7 600 1405 2 i l l d 0 868 i I O4 0 390 l 0 000 c i l S ai x eo in Gs thy D u o u T GPS H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix B 197 Figure 29 51763 and 51764 adapter mounting plate dimensions 1 4 20 PEM NUT 4 10 32 PEM NUT 4 eet t 0 375 90 3752 45 X 0 11842 g T H 11 853 o o 1 1 1 1 9 491 e e i 1 1 1
234. nu listing continues during press and hold H7 ASD Operation Manual 23 Rotary Encoder Functions as the Up key the Down key and the Enter key Turn the Rotary Encoder either clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down key functions Press the Rotary Encoder to perform the Enter function Simultaneously pressing and turning the Rotary Encoder performs a user defined function see Program EOI Option Setup Preferences Pressed Encoder Action MON PRG Provides a means to access the three root menus Pressing the MON PRG key repeatedly loops the system through the three root menus see Figure 21 on pg 30 While looping through the root menus the Program menu will display the last menu screen or sub menu item being accessed at the time that the MON PRG key was pressed Figure 18 The H7 Electronic Operator Interface TOSHIBA LCD Display Enter Key Local Remote Up Down Arrow O LOCAL Key LED REMOTE ENTER A NZ Keys Rotary Encod Monitor Program ee ESC Rotary Encoder Key PRG STOP Run Key RUN RESET LED Esc Key Stop Reset Key EOI Operation The EOI is the primary input output device for the user The EOI may be used to monitor system functions input data into the system or perform diagnostics Note The Up Down arrow keys and the Enter key may be used to
235. nuous light load 1 at a load of less than 50 of its rated capacity or it drives a load which produces a very small amount of inertia it may become unstable and produce abnormal vibration or trips because of an over current condition In such a case the carrier frequency may be lowered to compensate for this undesirable condition see Program Special Control Parameters Carrier Frequency Note For proper operation the carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes Motor Load Combinations When the drive is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads it may result in unstable operation e motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the drive e Anexplosion proof motor When using the drive with an explosion proof motor or other special motor types lower the carrier frequency to stabilize the operation DO NOT set the carrier frequency below 2 2 kHz if operating the system in the vector control mode Note For proper operation the carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes e Ifthe motor that is coupled to a load that has a large backlash or a reciprocating load use one of the following procedures to stabilize its operation e Adjust the S pattern acceleration deceleration setting e
236. of the RX input Factory Default 100 0 terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Changeable During Run Yes This is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a Minimum 250 0 given RX input level and motor load Maximum 4250 0 See F220 for further information on this setting This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint 2 and is the output Units torque value that is associated with setting of F218 This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque H7 ASD Operation Manual 93 F222 F222 RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode Note The RX2 input terminal may be used with the ASD Multicom option board only Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the RX2 input terminal e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip e Program gt Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt Use Option Card RX2 e Provide a Run command F or R Gain and Bias Settings When operating in the Speed Control mode the set
237. of the drive to any change the S1 S4 terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F144 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 55 516 Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays S5 S16 This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S5 S16 terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F145 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 73 F150 F153 OUT1 On Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Delays OUT1 Once the condition is met to close the OUTI A amp C output terminals this parameter delays the closing of the terminals by the programmed value For example if the OUT1 function is programmed as Overtorque Alarm OUTI will close 2 0 mS the default value for OUT1 On Delay after the overtorque condition occurs
238. of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD Direct Access Number F470 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 VIA Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints VI II Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the VI II input terminals Note See note on pg 33 for further information on the VI II terminal This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD 132 Direct Access Number F471 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 H7 ASD Operation Manual F472 F475 RR Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints gt RR gt Bias This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the
239. og EE 30 Frequency Command Mode 30 Monitor Mode ertet iE nt te tr RE ERE ERE ert a aaa 32 Program Made tte tre Pe ei oH eoe debo iau 34 Direct Access Parameter Information 4 eee eee eese eese eese e eene en seen stone ense toss etas ease 48 Direct Access Parameters Numbers eese 48 Alarms Faults Trips and Troubleshooting eene enne eene se tana 177 Alarms Faults and Erips aa beo ete tt ttem ER ee gi ee dedere dun 177 Viewing Trip Information rie re eren 177 Clearing acLEp e nene ot be hoo teri eie 178 H7 Codes and Error Messages rennen 179 Troubleshooting and Interpreting H7 Error Messages esee 179 sccssscscisvadesnsedcoseiadevsscestensascensesnsesusevecsessesecsgudcensessecssntsedadssadsuansendaececessessvecsenes 188 Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information eene 188 Enclosure Dimensions Weight sess nre 188 Conduit Plate Information 193 Conduit Extender Box option sesesseesseeeeeeeeeeren nere nennen nter enne 195 Appendix deii eH pe MOSS SIUE RD EE UE ESNS 196 H7 Adapter Mounting Plates eese nennen nennen nenne netten 196 ASD Adapter Mounting Plate Dimensions eese nenne
240. ogram gt Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings gt Enable Jog Window Note The Jog Window must be displayed on the EOI to perform the Jog function using the EOI 2 Press MON PRG to access the Jog Window 3 Using the Up Down arrow keys of the EOI select Reverse or Forward 4 Place the system in the Local mode Local Remote LED is on 5 Press and hold the Run key for the desired Jog duration Jog Using the Control Terminal Strip To initiate a Jog from the Control Terminal Strip perform the following 1 Assign a discrete input terminal to the Jog function see Table 6 on pg 67 2 Assign a discrete input terminal to the F Forward function and Reverse if required see Table 6 on pg 67 3 Provide a Forward and or Reverse command from the Control Terminal Strip 4 From the Jog Window use the Up Down arrow keys of the EOI to select Reverse or Forward Program Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings gt Enable Jog Window Press MON PRG to access the Jog Window 5 Place the system in the Remote mode Local Remote LED is off 6 Connect the assigned Jog terminal from step 1 to CC for the desired Jog duration 104 H7 ASD Operation Manual F261 F272 Jog Stop Control Program Frequency Setting Parameters gt Jog Settings This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode Settings Deceleration Stop Coast Stop DC Injection Braking Stop Di
241. ol input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD Direct Access Number F474 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 99 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 RX Gain Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX gt Gain This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F475 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 141 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 255 133 F476 F481 RX2 Bias Adjust Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RX2 gt B
242. on time H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F515 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds 141 F516 F517 Accel Decel Pattern 4 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 4 Accel Decel parameter Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 Direct Access Number F516 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes Accel Decel Switching Frequency 3 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 3 profile to the Accel 4 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration 142 Direct Access Number F517 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F520 F521 Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Pattern Run This parameter Enables Disables the Pattern Run mode When enabled this feature allows up to 15 Preset Speeds to be run sequentially for a user determined amount of times Pattern Run Descr
243. onduit connection point This option makes adding and removing conduit easier and quicker Installation 1 Remove the conduit plate 49462 2 Install the Conduit Extender Box 53354 reusing the 2 screws from the conduit plate 3 Make the conduit and wiring connections 4 Install the Conduit Extender Box cover 53355 Figure 27 Conduit Extender Box H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix A 195 Appendix B H7 Adapter Mounting Plates The optional H7 mounting plates may be used when replacing a G3 ASD with the H7 ASD The mounting plates are fitted with permanently attached nuts for securing the H7 ASD to the adapter plate The perimeter mounting hole dimensions of the adapter plate allow the adapter plate to be mounted using the existing cabinet or wall holes Listed below are the device types that require an adapter plate and their associated adapter plate The adapter plate dimensions are shown on pg 197 199 Note Units not listed do not require an adapter plate H7 Model Adapter Plate H7 Model Adapter Plate Number Number 2035 2080 51762 205 4110 51761 4055 2270 4080 2330 2110 4330 51764 2160 4400 2220 4500 51763 6160 4220 4600 51769 4270 6120 51770 6060 m u 196 Appendix B H7 ASD Operation Manual ASD Adapter Mounting Plate Dimensions Figure 28 51761 and 51762 adapter mou
244. opping should not be a task of the ASD alone It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection in accordance with the 1999 NEC and applicable local codes Adequate working space and illumination must be provided for adjustment inspection and maintenance of the ASD see 1999 NEC Article 110 16 A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding the electrical system Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings See the section titled Installation and Connections on pg 6 for additional information on installing the drive H7 ASD Operation Manual 3 DANGER Maintenance Precautions Use lockout tagout procedures on the branch circuit disconnect before servicing the ASD The ASD maintains a residual charge for a while after turning the ASD off Wait at least five minutes before servicing the ASD after turning the ASD power off Ensure that the Charge LED is off Do Not attempt to disassemble modify or repair the ASD Call your Toshiba sales representative for repair information Do not place any objects inside of the ASD Turn the power on only after attaching the front cover and Do Not remove the front cover of the ASD when the power is on If the ASD should emit smoke or an unusual odor or sound turn the power off immediately The heat sink and
245. orque Control mode the forward speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here If Setting is selected the value set at F426 is used as the Forward Speed Limit input Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option Setting Direct Access Number F425 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Forward Speed Limit Level Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F425 126 Direct Access Number F426 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F427 F430 Reverse Speed Limit Input Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control function When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode the reverse speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here If Setting is selected the value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input Settings Disabled VIAL RR RX RX2 option Setting Direct Access Number F427 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Reverse Speed Limit Level Program Torque Setting Parameters Torque Control This para
246. orque Limit 3 130 Driving Torque Limit 4 130 Drooping 113 Drooping Control 41 Dynamic Braking 39 110 Dynamic Braking Enable 110 E Electronic Gear Setting 118 Electronic Operator Interface 23 Electronic Thermal Protection 1 54 154 Electronic Thermal Protection 2 78 Electronic Thermal Protection 3 79 Electronic Thermal Protection 4 80 Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time 155 Emergency Off Mode Settings 155 Emergency Off Setting 39 Enclosure Dimensions 188 211 Enclosure Dimensions Weight 188 Encoder 210 End Frequency 101 Enter Key 23 EOI Bezel Mounting Dimensions 202 EOI Bezel Plate Dimensions mounting 202 EOI Features 23 EOI Installation Precautions 200 EOI Operation 24 EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD MTG KIT 201 EOI Remote Mounting w o the ASD MTG KIT 201 EOI Setup Options 34 Escape Key 23 Extended Terminal Function 61 Extender Cables 200 217 F F 11 12 F Input Terminal Assignment 62 F Input Terminal Delay 71 Fan Control 39 158 Fault Status 33 Faults 177 Feedback in Panel Mode 167 Feedback Parameters 41 42 Feedback Settings 41 Feedback Settings Differential D Gain 117 Feedback Settings Lower Deviation Limits 117 Feedback Settings Upper Deviation Limits 117 Feedback Source 116 Feedback Source Delay Filter 116 FH 52 FL Off Delay 76 FL On Delay 74 FL Output Terminal Assignment 70 FLA 11 13 FLA B and C sw
247. pendix H 211 Table 21 460 Volt 5 0 350 HP Spare Parts Listing MODEL INPUT CONTROL DC BUS MAIN LCD NUMBER FUSE FUSE FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR XSISTORS RECT CAPS MOV DISPLAY MOV MOV VT130H7U R S and T FU1 A FU2 A MS1 MS2 FAN2 R21 A B C IGM RECT CAP 1 23 EOI 4055 00621 49648 N A 4080 50037 Reside on the Main Circuit PCB 50830 49648D N A 4110 51088 4160 02424 47965 45237 Pon 4220 2 N A 00388 49012 4270 34835 Nie 00629 47966 45238 4330 45678 46023 Eos 49047 00388 45182 4400 N A Q 2 03250 47967 45239 N A 50855 4500 2 47968 30536 4600 00625 42338 N A 46465 3 6 44362 4750 42337 35489 A 00642 39653 45241 03670 00626 3 3 49 410 42338 00226 00226 8 37160 30624 46467 45241 30122 412KA 00628 42767 N A 2 2 6 6 10 46112 3 415 44272 51501 42768 00224 258 d 43855 43855 45242 30122 03672 420KA 44362 30965 3 2 6 14 2 52783 52783 30634 37565 43637 425KA 51973 3 2 3 12 14 37576 52751 30634 33787 45242 37568 430KA 48718 3 NEC 4 18 Q 51958 00226 37578 37578 37565 PC40300 37568 03670 435KA 3 0 37698 37693 37580 18 P042 8 6 N A Parenthesized are the total q
248. perform the functions of the Rotary Encoder The Rotary Encoder will be used in this explanation and throughout this manual for the Up Down and Enter key functions The software used with the H7 is menu driven thus making it a select and click environment The operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI To change a parameter setting go to the Program mode by pressing the MON PRG key until the Program menu is displayed Turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block Press the Rotary Encoder repeat if there is a submenu The selection will take on the reverse video format dark background light text Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the value of the parameter Press the Esc key while the display is in the reverse video mode to exit the menu without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting Repeated Esc key entries takes the menu back one level each time the Esc key is pressed until the root level is reached After reaching the root level continued Esc entries will toggle the system to and from the Frequency Command screen and the Panel menu Note Panel menu changes made in this way will affect EOI controlled ASD operation only LED Keypad controlled functions will not be affected LED Keypad controlled operation settings may be viewed or changed at F008 H7 ASD Operation Manual System Operation Initial Setup Upon initi
249. ply voltage is as specified supply Low input voltage Make a service call if the failure persists 186 H7 ASD Operation Manual EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes Corrective Action RTRY Retry Indicator This display provides an indication that the ASD is in the Retry mode and that the motor may restart without warning F303 may be setup and enabled to allow for an automatic motor restart after a momentary power outage or a momentary loss of the ST to CC connection T Communication This fault is caused by an Corrupted data at the master Ensure that the master Error inability of the ASD to ASD ASD is programmed communicate with an Broken or improper properly optional device or another connections associated with Ensure that the ASD in a master follower the setup connections are correct configuration Improper setup information at and secured the option device Confirm all communications settings Make a service call if the failure persists UC Low Current Trip This fault occurs when the Low current threshold setting Ensure that the Low output current of the ASD in too high current value is falls below the level defined Low current detection time is appropriate for the at F611 and remains there too short application F611 for the time set at F612 Increase the Low current detection time F612 Disable the Low current detection feature F610 Make a service call if the failure p
250. power leads connected to the motor Figure 3 ASD Motor connection diagram ASD MCCB L1 R T1 U 3 Ph GENE p ase NUM Power O eere Main Circuit tery Motor Source L3 T 13 7W G E a 9 Control onu Strip Connect the 3 phase input power to the input terminals of the ASD at L1 R L2 S and L3 T Connect the output of the ASD to the motor from terminals T1 U T2 V and T3 W The input and output conductors and terminal lugs used shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in Appendix E on pg 205 If conductors smaller than the recommended sizes are used in parallel for the input or output power each branch of the parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other parallel sets 1 e place U1 V1 and W1 in one conduit and U2 V2 and W2 in another Note National and local codes should be referenced when running more than three conductors in the same conduit Install a molded case circuit breaker MCCB or fuse between the 3 phase power source and the ASD in accordance with the 2002 NEC Article 430 102 through 430 111 and the fault current setting of the ASD For 600 volt ASDs the 15 HP or less drives P N VT130H7U6015 6160 require a class J fuse rated at 600 Volts 30 A Lead Length Specifications Adhere to the NEC and any local codes during the installation of ASD Motor systems Excessi
251. r F863 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Torque Reference Station Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release 174 Direct Access Number F865 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 H7 ASD Operation Manual F866 F893 Torque Reference Address Direct Access Number F866 Program gt Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings Parameter Type Selection List The 20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system Factory Default 0 This function is unavailable at the time of this release Fault Detect Station Number Direct Access Number F868 Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings Parameter Type Selection List The 20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system Factory Default 0 This function is unavailable at the time of this release Station Mode Direct Access Number F869 Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings Parameter Type Selection List The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system Factory Default Station Mode 0 This function is unavailable at the time of this release Optional Parameter 1 Direct Access Number F890 Program Communication Setting Parameters Optiona
252. r sets the RR input level that represents RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 torque or frequency This value is entered as 0 100 of the RR input signal range Direct Access Number F210 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings FBlgc Setpoint 2 ol Is 4 o a 5 i3 Setpoint 1 Col Fe10 0 0 Fett F213 Setpoint 1 Hz Setpoint Hz Dutput Frequency Torque Settings Fa2e Setpoint 2 l 1 l Setpoint 1 CO F210 Qutput Torque F214 F215 Setpoint 1 X torque Setpoint 2 lt torque H7 ASD Operation Manual F211 F214 RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints RR This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode See F210 for further information on this setting This parameter sets the RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F210 Direct Access Number F211 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0
253. ram Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Parameter Type Numerical Control Margin Modulation 96 Voltage Vector Control Factory Default 105 0 This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in the Voltage Vector Control mode Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 300 0 Units Constant Vector Control Direct Access Number F484 Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Parameter Type Numerical Control Margin Modulation 96 Voltage Vector Control Factory Default 105 0 This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in the Constant Vector Control mode Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 300 0 Units Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss Direct Access Number F487 Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Parameter Type Numerical Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss Factory Default 105 0 This parameter compensates for losses in the rotor to stator coupling of the excitation and torque current energy Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 H7 ASD Operation Manual 135 F489 F500 Dead Time Compensation Enable Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Dead Time Compensation This parameter Enables Disables the Dead Time Compensation function The Dead Time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of t
254. ram Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 11 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 4 Direct Access Number F544 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 12 Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual 145 F545 F553 Group 2 Speed 5 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F545 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 13 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 6 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F546 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 14 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F547 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 15 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 8 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Direct Access Number F548 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Group 3 Speed Repeat Factor Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Spe
255. rect Access Number F261 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Deceleration Stop Changeable During Run Yes Jump Frequency 1 Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies In conjunction with parameter F271 this parameter establishes a user defined frequency range the Jump Frequency and a plus or minus value During acceleration the output frequency of the drive will hold at the frequency of the lower level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration ramp reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range Then the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump Frequency range and continue upward as programmed During deceleration the output frequency of the drive will hold at the frequency of the upper level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed deceleration ramp reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency range Then the output frequency of the drive will decelerate to the lower level of the Jump Frequency range and continue downward as programmed Once set up and enabled it is on in all control modes User selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of mechanical resonance Direct Access Number F270 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth Program Special Cont
256. reset Speed 3 Multifunctional programmable discrete input S4 Discrete Input Emergency Off Multifunctional programmable discrete input RR Multifunction programmable analog input RR Analog Input 0 0 to 10 volt input 0 to 80 Hz output Figure 8 on pg 17 RX Multifunctional programmable analog input Re Analog Input 1610410 VDC input 80 to 80 Hz output Figure n peed II Multifunctional programmable analog input 4 0 to 20 mADC II Analog Input input 0 to 80 Hz output see Figure 5 on pg 14 for the location of the II terminal Figure 10 on pg 17 VI Multifunctional programmable analog input M Analog Input 60 to 10 VDC input 0 to 80 Hz output P24 DC Output 24 VDC 50 mA output Figure 11 on pg 17 PP DC Output PP 10 0 VDC voltage source for the external potentiometer Figure 12 on pg 17 OUTI Discrete Output Low Frequency Multifunctional programmable discrete output Figure 13 on pg 17 OUT2 Discrete Output Reach Frequency Multifunctional programmable discrete output Frequency Pulse an output pulse train that has a frequency which is E Output based on the output frequency of the ASD Figure 14 on pg L7 AM Output Produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the Figure 15 on pg 17 FM Output function assigned to this terminal see Table 5 on page 50 FLC Output Faul
257. rminal are listed in Table 5 on pg 50 Note To read voltage at this terminal a 100 500 resistor is required and must be connected from AM to AM The voltage is read across the 100 5000 resistor Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from AM to AM The AM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1 1024 The AM Terminal Adjustment F671 must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper response SW 1 may be switched to allow for the full range output to be either 0 1 mA or 4 20 mA when providing an output current or either 0 1 or 1 to 7 5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal Direct Access Number F670 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Current Changeable During Run Yes AM Terminal Adjustment Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters gt AM This function is used to calibrate the AM analog output terminal To calibrate the AM analog output connect a meter current or voltage as described at F670 With the drive running at a known frequency adjust this parameter F671 until the running frequency produces the desired DC level output at the AM terminal Direct Access Number F671 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 Analog 1 Terminal Setting Program Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters Analog 1 This parameter sets t
258. rn Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 10 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F579 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 11 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 11 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F580 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 12 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 12 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F581 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 13 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 13 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F582 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 14 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 14 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F583 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 15 Char
259. rogram Special Control Parameters Special Parameters gt Exciting Strengthening Coefficient This parameter determines the rate at which the excitation current is allowed to go from zero to saturation and is enabled at F481 Direct Access Number F480 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 64 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Over Exciting Cooperation Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Over Exciting Cooperation This parameter determines the method used to control the rate that the excitation current is allowed to reach saturation If Effective is selected the preset Torque Control or Speed Control settings will determine the rate that the motor reaches excitation saturation Settings Effective Applied by F480 134 Direct Access Number F481 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Effective Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F482 F487 Current Vector Control Direct Access Number F482 Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Parameter Type Numerical Control Margin Modulation gt Current Vector Control Factory Default 90 0 This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in the Current Vector Control mode Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 80 0 Maximum 300 0 Units Voltage Vector Control Direct Access Number F483 Prog
260. rol Parameters Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 1 see F270 Direct Access Number F271 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Jump Frequency 2 Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies Same as Jump Frequency 1 F270 and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped see the plus or minus value setting at F273 When multiple jump frequencies overlap the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F272 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 105 F273 F276 Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 2 F272 Direct Access Number F273 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz Jump Frequency 3 Program Special Control Parameters Jump Frequencies Same as Jump Frequency 1 F270 and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped see the plus or minus value setting at F275 When multiple jump frequencies overlap the syste
261. ronic Thermal Protection 4 Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 4 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps V A or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The name plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Electronic Thermal Protection settings 1 4 will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V A rather than Direct Access Number F181 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units V f Adjustment Coefficient Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters V f Adjustment Coefficient This parameter may be used in the Constant Torque or the Variable Torque modes only and should be adjusted gradually to improve the application specific torque requirements The Torque Boost setting F016 may be adjusted to improve the low frequency torque performance Note The Torque Boost setting should be adjusted gradually before attempting performance corrections using this parameter Direct Access Number F183 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 32 Ch
262. rs Preset Speeds 5 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F574 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 6 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds gt 6 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F575 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 7 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 7 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F576 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 8 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 8 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 Direct Access Number F577 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No Pattern 9 Characteristics Pattern Run Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Preset Speeds 9 Same as 1 Pattern Characteristics see F570 H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F578 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Time From Start Changeable During Run No 149 F579 F585 Pattern 10 Characteristics Patte
263. rs gt Scan Transmit Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 4 Scan Transmit Direct Access Number F844 Program Communication Setting Parameters gt Scan Transmit Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual 173 F845 F865 5 Scan Transmit Program Communication Setting Parameters Scan Transmit Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F845 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Scan 0 Changeable During Run Yes 6 Scan Transmit Program Communication Setting Parameters Scan Transmit Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F846 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Scan 0 Changeable During Run Yes S20 Error Mode Program Communication Setting Parameters S20 Settings The S20 system is Toshiba s high speed fiber optic communication system This function is unavailable at the time of this release Direct Access Number F850 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Mode 0 Error Detect Tim
264. rvoltage Trip is incurred A user selected contact may be actuated if so configured Direct Access Number F627 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Undervoltage Detection Time Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter sets the time that the undervoltage condition must exist to cause an Undervoltage trip when this function is enabled at F627 Direct Access Number F628 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 03 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Undervoltage Stall level Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter sets the low end of the DC bus voltage threshold that once exceeded will cause an Undervoltage Stall An Undervoltage Stall reduces the output frequency of the drive for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Undervoltage Trip when this function is Enabled at F627 If the condition persists an Undervoltage Trip will be incurred Note This feature may decrease deceleration times Direct Access Number F629 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 00 Maximum 100 0 Units 96 Brake Trouble Internal Timer Program Protection Parameters Brake Fault Timer This parameter determines the delay time to be used in the event
265. s section lists the available user notification codes of the EOI display and provides information that assists the user in the event that a Fault is incurred The user notification codes are displayed as an indication that a system function or system condition is active e g ATN DB DBON etc The code is displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation If a user setting or an ASD parameter has been exceeded or if a data transfer function produces an unexpected result a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely close a contact or engage a brake At the least an Alarm will cause a user notification to appear on the EOI display In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a specified time the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred A Trip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning or one or more of the variables listed below exceeds its normal range time and or magnitude Current e Voltage e Speed e Temperature e Torque or e Load The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip Listed below are operating conditions that may be us
266. se PP The function of output PP is to provide a 10 VDC output that may be divided using a potentiometer The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR programmed function OUT1 The default setting for this output terminal is the Output Low Speed indicator This output terminal may be programmed to provide an indication that 1 of 60 possible events has taken place This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake see F130 The OUTI contact is rated at 2A 250 VAC OUT2 The default setting for this output terminal is the ACC DEC Complete indicator This output terminal may be programmed to provide an indication that 1 of 60 possible events has taken place This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake see F131 The OUT2 contact is rated at 2A 250 VAC FP The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency of the ASD As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the FP output pulse rate This terminal may be programmed to provide output pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency or the magnitude of any 1 of the 31 the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 50 see F676 AM This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this termi
267. sted spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity 2 minimum H7 ASD Operation Manual Appendix H 213 Table 23 600 Volt 3 0 300 HP Spare Parts Listing MODEL INPUT CONTRO DC BUS MAIN LCD NUMBER FUSE LFUSE FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR XSISTORS RECT CAPS MOV DISPLAY MOV MOV VT130H7U R S and T FU1 A FU2 MS1 MS2 FAN1 FAN2 R21 A B C IGM CAP 1 Q3 EOI 6035 N A 6060 49648F 49110 50037 6080 N A N A N A Reside on the Main Circuit PCB 6120 51088 49648G 6160 49660 51264 42012 6220 02424 32143 00388 45237 30560 6270 9 B 39519 9 42608 3 6330 rou En 44943 00386 37162 Q 6400 Q oS cu 33030 6500 42610 iow 1 32910 30633 ko 00625 30122 6600 44362 3 6 6750 30560 39521 9 45479 42338 6 30122 00226 30634 9 2 51501 45242 42141 45520 42167 00224 39522 3 30122 3 6 12 615K 37164 2 45241 45480 6 34835 620K 42117 B 02 32911 pou 3 45481 42768 45182 625K Q 00026 48718 30634 39522 9 2 12 37698 45242 PC15360 6 630K P500 M Ts 3 Parenthesized the total quantities model number Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed If the total quantity per un
268. sufficient voltage To avoid this Do Not connect the brake or the brake contactor to the output of the ASD If an output contactor is used for bypass operation it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the output terminals of the ASD T1 U T2 V or T3 W If a secondary magnetic contactor MC is used between the output of the ASD and the motor it should be interlocked such that the ST CC terminals are disconnected before the output contactor is opened Do Not open and then close a secondary magnetic contactor between the ASD and the motor unless the ASD is off and the motor is not rotating Note Re application of power via a secondary contact while the ASD is on or while the motor is still turning may cause ASD damage On some devices the ST to CC connection is further enhanced by the operation of the MS1 AUX relay circuit The MS1 AUX relay circuit is normally open and closes the ST to CC connection only after normal system power is available The MS1 AUX relay circuit prohibits the ST to CC connection in the event that the MS1 contactor fails to close during start up or if MSlopens while the ASD is running For the 230 volt ASD this feature is available on the 30 HP system on the 460 volt ASD this feature is available on the 50 HP and above systems and on the 600 volt ASD it is available on the 60 HP and above systems Figure 1 MS1 AUX Circuit Configuration ST1 to CC
269. t 2 frequency F236 Once set as the PG input pulse count changes the directional information or the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference Setpoint 1 frequency direction speed The range of values for this parameter is 100 to 100 of the PG input pulse count range Note Further application specific PG settings may be performed from the following path Program Feedback Parameters PG Settings H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F234 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings Rese ain a E Setpoint 1 C F234 Setpoint 1 CO FH requenc F235 Setpoint Freq F237 Setpoint 2 Freg 99 F235 F240 PG Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency Program Frequency Setting Parameters Speed Reference Setpoints 2 PG This parameter is used to set the direction gain and bias of the PG input terminal when it is used as the Speed Direction Control input See F234 for further information on this setting This parameter sets PG Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of F234 Direct Access Number F235 Parameter Type Numeric
270. t level is above the specified inductance onto the ASD range AC input to minimize voltage spikes OP 3 Overvoltage The bus voltage exceeds The incoming utility power Install a DBR Run specifications while level is above the specified Install an input running range inductance onto the ASD System is regenerating AC input to minimize Unstable load voltage spikes Balance the load OT Overtorque Trip This fault is caused by a ASD is too small for the Ensure that the ASD is torque requirement by the application properly matched to the load in excess of the setting F616 or F617 settings are too application of F616 or F617 for a time low Ensure that the F616 and longer than the setting of F617 settings are F618 appropriate for the application Ensure that the load is unobstructed P ER Frequency Point This alarm is provided to Frequency settings are too Increase the range Setting Error notify the operator that two close to each other between the two Alarm speed reference frequency frequency settings setpoint settings are too close to each other This condition may occur when configuring the gain and bias of the analog inputs of the Control Terminal Strip when operating in the Speed or Torque Control modes POFF Control Circuit This fault is caused by an Defective control board Replace the control board Undervoltage undervoltage condition at Excessive load on the power Ensure that the input the 5 15 or the 24 VDC sup
271. t relay common FLB Output Fault relay N C Figure 16 on pg 17 FLA Output Fault relay N O CC Control common Do Not connect to Earth Gnd Discrete Input Terminals On connected to CC H7 ASD Operation Manual 11 Terminal Descriptions Note The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their default settings as mapped on pg 34 or via the Direct Access method Program gt Direct Access applicable parameter number See the section titled Program Mode on pg 34 for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes see the sections titled Terminal Selection Parameters on pg 36 and Default Setting Changes on pg 26 ST The default setting for this terminal is ST The function of this input as ST is a Standby mode controller system is in Standby when on As the default setting this terminal must be connected to CC for normal operation If not connected to CC Off is displayed on the LCD screen This input terminal may be programmed to any of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F113 RES A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault indications from the display F The default setting for this terminal is Forward Run Forward Run runs the motor in the Forward direction when it is on This input terminal may be programmed to 1 of the 68 possible func
272. t the output of Overcurrent short circuit is detected at V or W leads of the ASD the ASD is correctly Startup the output of the ASD are not within the connected to the motor acceptable range Decrease the output short circuit detection pulse on time settings of F614 OCR Dynamic Braking This fault is caused by the Nodynamic braking resistor Install a DBR Resistor inability of the system to DBR installed Extend the deceleration Overcurrent adequately discharge the Deceleration time is too time bus voltage during short Ensure that the DBR regeneration Improper DBR setup setup information is information correct program Defective IGBT7 or protection parameters gt IGBT7 ckt dynamic braking Excessive input voltage Increase the value of the DBR installed Replace IGBT7 Ensure that the 3 phase input voltage is within established parameters OFF ST to CC This fault is caused by the e ST to CC connection is Close the ST to CC Opened ST to CC connection being open connection open If applicable MS1 AUX is Confirm that the MS1 defective inoperative or AUX circuit is there is an open circuit in functioning properly the MS1 AUX circuit see Remove the ST to CC Installation Notes on pg 6 requirement via Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Special Functions gt ST Signal Selection gt ST CC Not Required 184 H7 ASD Operation Manual EOI Display OH
273. tage UAM aa ot d be O A amp IM Hon Q3 ad s c v 13 Voltage e l 4 4 4 j Motor Forward F Control P24 Reverse R Circuitry Standby ST FLA FLB Reset RES o Preset Speed 1 Si Common FLC Serial TTL RS232 485 Preset Speed 2 s2 Connector Connector c Preset Speed 3 S3 CNUPA CNUIA gut 0 Emergency Off S4 Cet gute CC Common Input Signal 4 20 mA PK Input Signal AM O 0 to 10 VDC 1 ce 10 VDC Dutput EE IN Input Signal Potentiometer voltage 10 to 10 VDC_Y 3s re 4 20 mA 7 f Freq CC RR G E CC F Meter External 1 to 10 k Ohm 4 W or voltage from RR to CC 0 to 10 VDO H7 ASD Operation Manual Motor Characteristics Listed below are some variable speed AC motor control concepts with which the user of the H7 Adjustable Speed Drive should become familiar Motor Autotuning Motor production methods may cause minor differences in the motor operation The negative effects of these differences may be minimized by using the Autotune feature of the H7 ASD Autotuning is a function of the H7 that measures several parameters of the connected motor and places these readings in a stored table The software uses the information in the table to help optimize the response of the ASD to application specific load and operational requirements The Autotuning function may be e
274. tall Level 160 Overvoltage Stall Level fast 159 220 P P24 11 13 PA 9 110 Panel Menu 31 Parity 168 Pattern 41 Characteristics Pattern Run 148 Pattern 10 Characteristics Pattern Run 150 Pattern 411 Characteristics Pattern Run 150 Pattern 12 Characteristics Pattern Run 150 Pattern 13 Characteristics Pattern Run 150 Pattern 14 Characteristics Pattern Run 150 Pattern 415 Characteristics Pattern Run 150 Pattern 42 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 3 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 4 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 5 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 6 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 7 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 8 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern 9 Characteristics Pattern Run 149 Pattern Run 42 143 Pattern Run 1 Run Time Setting 150 Pattern Run 10 Run Time Setting 153 Pattern Run 11 Run Time Setting 153 Pattern Run 12 Run Time Setting 153 Pattern Run 13 Run Time Setting 153 Pattern Run 14 Run Time Setting 154 Pattern Run 15 Run Time Setting 154 Pattern Run 2 Continuation Mode Run Time Setting 151 Pattern Run 3 Run Time Setting 151 Pattern Run 4 Run Time Setting 151 Pattern Run 5 Run Time Setting 151 Pattern Run 6 Run Time Setting 152 Pattern Run 7 Run Time Setting 152 Pattern Run 8 Run Time Setting 152 Pattern Run 9 Run Time Setting 152 Pattern Run Con
275. tc Settings Use Control Terminal Strip Use LED Keypad Option Use Common Serial TTL Use RS232 485 Use Communication Card Frequency Reference Source This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Frequency speed command Settings Use Use RR Use RX Use Option Card RX2 Use LED Keypad Option Use Binary BCD Input Use Common Serial TTL Use RS232 485 Use Communication Card Use Motorized Pot Simulation Use Pulse Input Option Wizard Finish This screen is the final screen of the Startup Wizard The basic parameters of the ASD have been set Click Finish to return to the Program mode Additional application specific programming may be required H7 ASD Operation Manual Wizard Command Source Where will your run stop and other commands come from Use terminal block Wizard Frequency Source Where will your frequency reference come from Wizard Finished Wizard is done Other parameters may need adjustment for proper operation Always read instruction manual to ensure proper setup 29 System Configuration and Menu Options 30 Root Menus The MON PRG key accesses the three primary modes of the H7 the Frequency Command mode the Monitor mode and the Program mode From either mode press the MON PRG key to loop through to the other two modes see Figure 21 While in the Frequency Command mode pressing the ESC key toggles the menu to and
276. that once exceeded will cause an Overvoltage Stall An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip If the overvoltage condition persists for over 250 uS an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred Note This feature may increase deceleration times H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F625 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 00 Maximum 250 0 Units 46 159 F626 F630 Overvoltage Stall Level Program Protection Parameters Stall This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that once exceeded will cause an Overvoltage Stall An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip If the overvoltage condition persists for over 4 mS an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred Note This feature may increase deceleration times Direct Access Number F626 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 0 Maximum 250 0 Units Undervoltage Trip Program Protection Parameters Undervoltage Ridethrough This parameter Enables Disables the Undervoltage Trip function When the DC bus voltage exceeds the settings of F628 and F629 an Unde
277. the Torque Control mode Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive a binary control input e Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Use Control Terminal Strip Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode 1 gt Use Binary BCD Input Program gt Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Terminals select and set the desired discrete input terminals to Binary Bit s 0 7 or 0 MSB The binary terminal input word will control the direction speed or torque of the motor Provide a Run command F or R Direction Gain Bias Setting When operating in the Speed Control mode the settings that determine the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals are BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F229 the binary input value 96 of 255p that represents the BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F228 BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F231 and the binary input value of 255p that represents the BIN Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F230 Note 255 is the decimal equivalent of the 8 bit BIN word with all input terminals set to one 255 decimal 11111111 binary When operating in the Torque Control mode the settings that determine the direction gain and bias of the BIN binary input terminals are BIN Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F232 e the binary
278. the discharge resistors may become extremely hot to the touch Allow the unit to cool before coming in contact or performing service on these items Remove power from the ASD during extended periods of non use The system should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts cleanliness and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely Service Life Information Part Name Service Life Remarks Large Capacity Electrolytic When not used for long periods t 5 Years Capacitor charge semi annually Cooling Fan 26 000 Hours CN Connectors 100 Connects Disconnects On board Relays 500 000 Actuations H7 ASD Operation Manual Adjustable Speed Drive Inspection Upon receipt perform the following checks Inspect the unit for shipping damage e Check for loose broken or damaged parts e Ensure that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to the order specifications Report any discrepancies to your Toshiba sales representative Storage Store the device in a well ventilated location in its shipping carton is recommended Avoid storage locations of extreme temperatures high humidity dust or metal particles Disposal Contact the local or state environmental agency in your area for details on the disposal of electrical components and packaging Do not dispose of the unit via incineration H7 ASD Operation Manual 5 Installation a
279. the motor speed when at the 100 output torque gain while Factory Default 60 00 operating in the Drooping Control mode This function determines the speed of the individual motors at the 100 Drooping Gain setting for motors that Changeable During Run Yes share the same load Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Hz Drooping Insensitive Torque Range Direct Access Number F323 Program Feedback Parameters gt Drooping Control Parameter Type Numerical This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings Factory Default 10 00 will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be followed Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units H7 ASD Operation Manual 113 F324 F354 Drooping Output Filter Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F324 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 200 0 Load Inertia Acc Dec Torque Program Feedback Parameters Drooping Control Load Inertia This parameter is used for calculating accel decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode Direct Access Number F325 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0
280. the output of the drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event of a trip 114 Direct Access Number F354 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F355 F357 At Frequency Powerline Switching Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching When enabled this parameter sets the frequency at which the At Frequency Powerline Switching function engages The At Frequency Powerline Switching function commands the system to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to commercial power once reaching the frequency set here Direct Access Number F355 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz ASD side Switching Wait Time Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before outputting a signal to the motor once the switch to drive output criteria has been met OUT1 G7 Commercial Power gt as Switch to drive command uTe Direct Access Number F356 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Commercial Power Wait Time Program Termin
281. the specification UL 1995 the Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment and complies with the applicable requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned air Enclosure Dimensions Weight Table 10 Conduit Plate 2 Number h Ce al eee init Shipping a 19 VT130H7U in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm Ibs Ibs and 194 Bottom Top 2010 2015 2025 8 47 215 7 28 185 7 33 186 8 47 215 7 95 202 6 74 171 0 53 13 0 23 6 10 12 49462 2035 2055 2080 22 N A 2110 41 48 2160 43 50 14 22 361 49033 2220 12 16 309 11 23 285 14 22 361 13 05 331 11 46 291 0 55 14 0 28 7 45 52 2270 2330 15 72 399 47 54 49032 2400 23 24 63 625 17 50 445 12 81 325 22 33 567 23 75 603 14 25 362 0 75 19 0 38 10 80 111 50097 4015 4025 22 8 47 215 7 28 185 7 33 186 8 47 215 7 95 202 6 74 171 0 53 13 0 23 6 11 13 49462 N A 4035 188 Appendix A H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 10 Continued Conduit Plate E d Number Mogel B G Shipping see pg 193 Number Fi9 nim inimm in mm in mm in mm inimm in mm in mm eight Weight 194 VT130H7U Ibs Ibs Bottom Top 4055 11 13 4080 847 215 7 28 185 7 33 186 8 47 215 7 95 202 6 74 171 0 53 13 0
282. timum performance H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F015 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Constant Torque Changeable During Run No 53 F016 F017 Motor 1 Torque Boost Program Fundamental Parameters Motor Set 1 The Motor 1 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 1 Base Frequency F014 setting The value programmed as a boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide smoother operation Base Frequency Voltage Base Frequency Output Voltage Percent Torque Boost Output Frequency Note Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Direct Access Number F016 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Soft Stall Program Protection Parameters gt Overload This parameter Enables Disables the Soft Stall function When enabled the Soft Stall function reduces the output frequency of the ASD when the current requirements of the motor exceed the Electronic Thermal Protection 1 setting F600 thus reducing the output current If the current drops below the motor overload protection level set
283. ting within a specified time the output of the ASD will accelerate to the programmed frequency setpoint If not a trip will be incurred The Soft Stall feature is available when the Program gt Protection Parameters gt Overload gt Motor Overload Trip Enable Disable parameter is enabled only Soft Stall is highly effective in preventing motor overload trips when used on fans blowers pumps and other centrifugal loads which require less torque at lower frequencies Note The Soft Stall setting may affect acceleration times and patterns 54 Direct Access Number F017 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Not Selected Changeable During Run No H7 ASD Operation Manual F018 F018 Preset Speed 1 Direct Access Number F018 Program Pattern Run Control 2 Preset Speeds gt 1 Parameter Type Numerical Up to 15 output frequency values that fall within the Lower Limit and the Factory Default 0 0 Upper Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a Preset Speed This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0001 and is identified as Preset Speed 1 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Minimum Lower Limit F013 Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed Changeable During Run Yes Maximum Upper Limit F012 Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed control input at the S1 S4 terminals Units Hz
284. tings that determine the direction gain and bias of the RX2 terminal are RX2Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F223 the RX2 input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency F222 2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F225 and the RX2 input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency F224 When operating in the Torque Control mode the settings that determine the direction gain and bias of the RX2 terminal are RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F226 the RX2 input signal level that represents the RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 1 F222 RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F227 and the RX2 input signal level that represents the RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint 2 F224 Once set as the RX2 input voltage changes the directional information the output frequency or the output torque of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the RX2 input level that represents RX2 Reference Setpoint 1 frequency direction torque frequency This value is entered as 100 to 100 of the 10 to 10 VDC RX2 input signal range The input signal may be trimmed using F476 Bias and F477 Gain 94 Direct Access Number F222 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings
285. tion Program Protection Parameters Arm Short Check Settings This parameter sets the pulse width of the output pulse that is applied to the ASD output during an Output Short Circuit test Direct Access Number F614 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Units uS Overtorque Trip Program Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter Enables Disables the Over Torque Tripping function When enabled the ASD trips if a torque larger than the setting of F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618 When disabled the ASD does not trip due to overtorque conditions H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F615 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 157 F616 F621 Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Positive Torque Program Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive Direct Access Number F616 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 150 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Units Overtorque Trip Alarm Level Negative Torque Program Protection Parameters Overtorque Parameters This parameter
286. tion 34 Program Menu Navigation 34 Program Mode 34 Proportional P Gain 116 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 116 Protection Parameters 39 Pulse Width Modulation 19 PWM Carrier Frequency 109 R R 11 12 R Input Terminal Assignment 62 R Input Terminal Delay 73 R F Priority Selection 60 Reach Settings 37 H7 Operation Manual Real Time Clock 210 Realtime Clock Setup 34 Reference Priority Selection 83 Regeneration Torque Limit 1 129 Regeneration Torque Limit 2 130 Regeneration Torque Limit 3 130 Regeneration Torque Limit 4 131 Regeneration Torque Limit Setting 1 129 Release After Run Timer brake 161 Remote EOI Required Hardware 200 RES 11 12 RES Input Terminal Assignment 62 RES Input Terminal Delay 73 Reset 51 Retry Restart Configuration 39 Reverse Speed Limit Input 127 Reverse Speed Limit Level 127 Review Startup Screen 35 Ridethrough Mode 109 Root menu mapping 30 Root Menus 30 Rotary Encoder 24 RR 11 12 RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 88 RR Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency 89 RR Speed Reference Setpoint 2 89 RR Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency 89 RR Torque Reference Setpoint 1 89 RR Torque Reference Setpoint 2 90 RS232 15 RS485 15 RS485 Baud Rate 171 RS485 Communications Time Out Time RS485 168 RS485 Communications Time Out Action 169 RS485 Master Output 172 RS485 Response Delay Time 172 RS4
287. tion Time 160 Undervoltage Stall level 160 Undervoltage Trip 160 Undervoltage Ridethrough 39 Unit Weight 188 Up Key 23 Upper Limit Frequency 27 52 H7 Operation Manual Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment 161 Use Speed Mode 120 User notification codes 179 Utility Parameters 35 V V f Adjustment 46 V f Five Point Setting 46 V f Group 166 V f Pattern 53 Vector Motor Model 44 Vector Motor Model Autotune Command 122 Versions 35 VI 11 13 H7 Operation Manual VIII Bias Adjust 132 Gain Adjust 132 VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 1 84 VI I Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency 85 VI II Speed Reference Setpoint 2 85 VI I Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency 85 VI I Torque Reference Setpoint 1 85 VI II Torque Reference Setpoint 2 86 Viewing Trip Information 177 Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor 27 Volts per Hertz Setting 28 W Wizard Finish 29 223
288. tion on this parameter Direct Access Number F023 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 7 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 7 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0111 and is identified as Preset Speed 7 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F024 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Low Speed Signal Output Frequency Program Terminal Selection Parameters Reach Settings The Low Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency threshold that activates the assigned output terminal so long as the ASD output is at or below this setting see Table 7 on pg 72 for the available output assignments Direct Access Number F100 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Reach Frequency Program Terminal Selection Parameters Reach Settings The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that when reached or is within the bandwidth specified by parameter
289. tions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F111 R The default setting for this terminal is Reverse Run Reverse Run runs the motor in the Reverse direction when it is on This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F112 S1 The default setting for this terminal is S1 The function of this input as S1 is to run the motor at Preset Speed 1 see Preset Speed 1 on pg 55 when it is on This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F115 S2 The default setting for this terminal is 2 The function of this input as S2 is to run the motor at Preset Speed 2 see Preset Speed 2 on pg 56 when it is on This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F116 S3 The default setting for this terminal is S3 The function of this input as S3 is to run the motor at Preset Speed 3 see Preset Speed 3 on pg 56 when it is on This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on page 67 see F117 S4 The default setting for this terminal is Emergency Off normally closed The function of this input as the Emergency Off is to remove power from the output of the ASD and may apply a supplemental braking system using the method selected at F603 This input terminal m
290. tment The H7 ASD software monitors the output current of the system and determines when an overload condition occurs The overload current level is a percentage of the rated system current This function protects the motor from overload The default setting for the overload detection circuit is set to the maximum rated current of the drive at the factory This setting will have to be adjusted to match the rating of the motor with which the drive is to be used To change the overload reference level see Electronic Thermal Protection 1 on pg 154 H7 ASD Operation Manual 19 Operation Above 60 Hz A motor produces more noise and vibration when it is operated at frequencies above 60 Hz Also when operating a motor above 60 Hz the rated limit of the motor or its bearings may be exceeded this may void the motor warranty Contact the motor manufacturer for additional information before operating the motor above 60 Hz Power Factor Correction DO NOT connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the output of the drive If the drive is used with a motor that is equipped with a capacitor for power factor correction remove the capacitor from the motor Connecting either of these devices to the output of the drive may cause the drive to malfunction and trip or the output device may cause an over current condition resulting in damage to the device or the drive Light Load Conditions When a motor is operated under a conti
291. to CC Not Required setting allows the ASD to operate without the ST to CC connection The control terminal ST may be configured for other functions The Interlock with F R Terminal setting configures the F Forward and R Reverse control terminals for the secondary function of Standby Closing a set of contacts to either F or R will cause the ASD to accelerate the motor to the programmed setpoint of F or R Opening the F and R contact will disable the ASD and the motor will coast to a stop The control terminal ST may be configured for other functions P ES ond R Off F or R On H7 ASD Operation Manual 59 F105 F106 R F Priority Selection Direct Access Number F105 Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List The R F Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD if both the R Factory Default Reverse and F control terminals are activated Changeable During Run No Settings Reverse Suspend The waveforms below depict the motor response for all combinations of the F and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen Motor Direction The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated Input Terminal Priority Direct Access Number F106 Program Terminal Selection Parameters gt Input Specia
292. tor control may be switched from the Motor 1 profile to the Motor 2 profile during a multiple motor profile configuration by connecting this terminal to CC 15 Motor 3 4 Switching Motor control may be switched from the Motor 3 profile to the Motor 4 profile during a multiple motor profile configuration by connecting this terminal to CC 16 Torque Limit 1 2 Switching Torque control may be switched from the Torque Limit 1 profile to the Torque Limit 2 profile during a multiple profile configuration by connecting this terminal to CC 17 Torque Limit 3 4 Switching Torque control may be switched from the Torque Limit 3 profile to the Torque Limit 4 profile during a multiple profile configuration by connecting this terminal to CC 18 Control Off Connecting this terminal to CC turns off PID control 19 Pattern 1 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 1 Pattern Run 20 Pattern 2 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 2 Pattern Run 2 Pattern 3 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 3 Pattern Run 22 Pattern 4 Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern 4 Pattern Run 23 Pattern Continue Continues with the last Pattern Run from its stopping point when connected to CC 24 Pattern Trigger This function is used to sequentially initiate each Preset Speed of a Pattern Run with e
293. trol Parameters 42 Pattern Run Description 143 Pattern Run Setup 143 PB 110 PG Disconnect Detection 118 PG Input Phases 118 PG Settings 41 PG Speed Reference Setpoint 1 99 PG Speed Reference Setpoint 1 frequency 100 PG Speed Reference Setpoint 2 100 PG Speed Reference Setpoint 2 frequency 100 Phase Loss 40 PID feedback 116 167 PO 9 Position Completion Range 119 Position Loop Gain 118 H7 Operation Manual Power Connections 9 Power Factor Correction 20 Power Running Torque Limit 1 128 PP 11 13 Preferences 34 Preset Speed 1 55 Preset Speed 10 107 Preset Speed 11 107 Preset Speed 12 108 Preset Speed 13 108 Preset Speed 14 108 Preset Speed 15 108 Preset Speed 2 56 Preset Speed 3 56 Preset Speed 4 56 Preset Speed 5 56 Preset Speed 6 57 Preset Speed 7 57 Preset Speed 8 107 Preset Speed 9 107 Preset Speed Direction 1 120 Preset Speed Direction 10 121 Preset Speed Direction 11 122 Preset Speed Direction 12 122 Preset Speed Direction 13 122 Preset Speed Direction 14 122 Preset Speed Direction 15 122 Preset Speed Direction 2 120 Preset Speed Direction 3 121 Preset Speed Direction 4 121 Preset Speed Direction 5 121 Preset Speed Direction 6 121 Preset Speed Direction 7 121 Preset Speed Direction 8 121 Preset Speed Direction 9 121 Preset Speed Mode 38 42 Preset Speeds 38 42 Pressed Encoder Ac
294. trol Reverse Limit LS Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its position If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip This function is normally used for over travel conditions 60 Light Load High speed Operation Enable This parameter sets the lower limit of an output frequency range in which the Light load High speed function may be used The Light load High speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD to the speed setting established in F341 for the time that the discrete input terminal that is set to Light Load High Speed Operation Enable is connected to CC 61 Snap Stop Control Enable TBD 62 Pre excite Motor Connecting this terminal to CC applies an excitation current to the motor holds shaft stationary for the duration of the connection 63 System Consistent Sequence BC braking command TBD 64 System Consistent Sequence B braking release Connecting this input terminal to CC initiates the brake release command This setting requires that another discrete input terminal be set to 65 System Consistent Sequence BA braking answer to complete the brake release command and to convey the status of the braking system to the user or to a dependent subsystem Once the braking release function is initiated the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down Trouble Internal Timer value is set at F632 Should the count down
295. uantities per model number Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity 2 minimum 212 Appendix H H7 ASD Operation Manual Table 22 460 Volt 5 0 350 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing PCB Part Numbers MODEL NUMBER 34499 35081 44292 44293 44379 44380 44665 44666 48048 48233 48605 48698 48700 48776 49500 50001 51389 VT130H7U A B C etc PCB Typeform 4055 K D 4080 D 4110 D 4160 C E D 4220 C E E 4270 D F E 4330 D G E 4400 D H E 4500 D 1 E G A 4600 E B G 3 4750 C A 3 410KA B E B c A 3 A A 412KA E B E A 3 3 415 B E D 3 3 420KA B F D 3 3 425KA E B F F 3 3 430KA C B G D Q 3 A A 435KA c B G H 3 3 Control Board TIH INV363 The fo Control Terminal Strip PCB 48570A 4 20 mA PCB 50611A lowing PCBs are common to the above listed typeforms Parenthesized are the total quantities per unit Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the sugge
296. uency Hysteresis Program Special Control Parameters Frequency Control This parameter provides a plus or minus value for the Run Frequency setting F241 Direct Access Number F242 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz End Frequency Program Special Control Parameters gt Frequency Control This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during deceleration before the drive goes to 0 0 Hz Direct Access Number F243 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz 0 Hz Dead Band Signal Program Special Control Parameters Special Parameters Dead Band of 0 Hz Frequency This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that until the commanded frequency surpasses this setting the ASD will output 0 Hz to the motor Note This setting will override the Startup Frequency setting F240 if this setting has a higher value H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F244 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 5 0 Units Hz 101 F250 F253 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Program Protection Parameters DC Braking During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection braki
297. umerical Factory Default 175 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 999 9 Units Hours X 100 H7 ASD Operation Manual F622 F625 Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time Program Protection Parameters Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a trip Direct Access Number F622 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 Units Seconds Overspeed Detection Frequency Range Program Protection Parameters Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that once exceeded will cause an Overspeed Detected alert Direct Access Number F623 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range Program Protection Parameters Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that once exceeded will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert Direct Access Number F624 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Overvoltage Stall Level fast Program Protection Parameters Stall This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold
298. un Yes Deceleration Time Adjustment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Analog Input Functions This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Deceleration Time Selecting either VI II or RR enables this feature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Deceleration Time setting Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Settings Disabled RR Direct Access Number F653 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Torque Boost Adjustment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Analog Input Functions This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Torque Boost setting Selecting either VI II or RR enables this feature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Torque Boost setting Settings Disabled RR 162 Direct Access Number F654 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F660 F661 Frequency Override Additive Input Program Feedback Parameters gt Override Control This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this f
299. unctions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F115 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed Cmd 1 Changeable During Run No S2 Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment S2 This parameter selects the functionality of the S2 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S2 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F116 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed Cmd 2 Changeable During Run No S3 Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment S3 This parameter selects the functionality of the S3 input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S3 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F117 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed Cmd 3 Changeable During Run No 54 Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment S4 This parameter selects the functionality of the S4 input terminal In addition the input terminal must
300. up 1 Speed 6 Direct Access Number F536 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 6 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 7 Direct Access Number F537 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 7 Changeable During Run No Group 1 Speed 8 Direct Access Number F538 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 8 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed Repeat Factor Direct Access Number F540 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Factory Default 1 Group 2 will be run 0 254 or Infinite Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 1 Direct Access Number F541 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 9 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 2 Direct Access Number F542 Program Pattern Run Control Parameters Speeds Parameter Type Selection List Same as 1 Group Speed 1 see F531 Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run No Group 2 Speed 3 Direct Access Number F543 Prog
301. up 4 Speed 6 148 Group 4 Speed 7 148 Group 4 Speed 8 148 Group 4 Speed Repeat Factor 147 H H7 Codes and Error Messages 179 H7 Error Messages 179 H7 Optional Devices 210 H7 Part Numbering Convention 188 Hz Per User defined Unit 165 I O and Control 11 I O Circuit Configurations 17 11 12 Important Notice 1 Initial Setup 25 Input 12 Terminal Assignment 65 Input 13 Terminal Assignment 65 Input 14 Terminal Assignment 65 Input 15 Terminal Assignment 66 H7 Operation Manual Input 16 Terminal Assignment 66 Input Special Functions 37 Input Terminal Assignment 36 Input Terminal Delays 37 Input Terminal Priority 60 Inrush Current Suppression 156 Inspection 5 Installation and Connections 6 Installation Notes 6 Installation Precautions 2 Integral I Gain 117 Interlock with ST 156 Introduction 1 J Jog Run Frequency 104 Jog Settings 38 Jog Stop Control 105 Jump Frequencies 45 Jump Frequency 1 105 Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth 105 Jump Frequency 2 105 Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth 106 Jump Frequency 3 106 Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth 106 L 9 L2 S 9 L3 T 9 LCD Display 23 LCD Port Connection 43 Lead Length Specifications 10 LED Option Override Multiplication Gain 167 Light Load Conditions 20 Line Power Switching 37 Link Reactor Information 208 Load Sharing Gain Input 126 Load produced Negative Torque 21 Local Remote Key 34
302. uring Run Yes Accel 1 Time Program Fundamental Parameters Accel Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 1 Acceleration profile The accel decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time Acceleration The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors applied power applied load and the physical properties of the motor winding parameters motor size etc The ASD will control the first of these factors input power The settings of the ASD control the frequency and amplitude of the applied voltage to the motor Under most operating conditions as the output frequency of the drive goes up so does the output voltage linear acceleration The ASD has the ability to modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to produce smoother operation or increased starting torque H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F009 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds 51 F010 F013 Decel 1 Time Program Fundamental Parameters Accel
303. urrent before tripping This setting applies the time 150 reference to the individual settings of each motor e g this setting references 150 of the F600 setting for the 1 motor The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater than 150 Direct Access Number F607 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 600 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 2400 Units Seconds Inrush Current Suppression Program Protection Parameters Soft Start The startup inrush current may be suppressed for up to 2 5 seconds This parameter determines the length of the inrush current suppression Direct Access Number F608 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 30 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 30 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Interlock with ST Program Protection Parameters Soft Start This parameter Enables Disables the ST to CC connection dependency on the successful completion of a Soft Start If enabled the ST to CC connection will happen only after a successful Soft Start Direct Access Number F609 Parameter Type Check Box Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Low Current Trip Program Protection Parameters Low Current Settings This parameter Enables Disables the low current trip feature When enabled the drive will trip on a low current fault if the output current of
304. ut terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F130 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Low Changeable During Run No OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment OUT2 This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT2 A amp C output terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the OUT2 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Direct Access Number F131 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RCH A D Complete Changeable During Run No FL Output Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Output Terminal Assignment FL This parameter sets the functionality of the FL output terminals to 1 of the 60 possible functions that are listed in Table 7 on pg 72 The on and off delay times of the FL terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed FLB 24 250 VAC The FLB contact is rated at 14 250 VAC The FLA and FLC contacts are rate
305. utput 14 Overtorque Alarm 44 Error Code Output 5 6 bit error output 15 Braking Resistor Overload Pre alarm 45 Error Code Output 6 6 bit error output 16 In Emergency Off 46 Designed Data Output 7 bit transmission output 17 Retrying 47 Designed Data Output 2 7 bit transmission output 18 Pattern Operation Switching Out 48 Designed Data Output 3 7 bit transmission output 19 PID Deviation Limit 49 Designed Data Output 4 7 bit transmission output 20 Start Stop 50 Designed Data Output 5 7 bit transmission output 21 RUE dapi Lost Phase Short 51 Designed Data Output 6 7 bit transmission output 22 Light Fault OL OC1 2 3 OP 52 Designed Data Output 7 7 bit transmission output 23 Bypass Output 1 53 Light Load Detection Signal 24 Bypass Output 2 54 Heavy Load Detection Signal 25 Fan On Off 55 Positive Torque Limit 26 Jogging 56 Negative Torque Limit 27 Control Terminal Strip Operation Command Mode 57 External Rush Suppression Relay Output 28 Total operation hours Alarm 58 Over Travel 29 Abnormal Communication Alarm external cause 59 Positioning Completion 72 H7 ASD Operation Manual F141 F145 R Input Terminal Delay Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Delays R This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD
306. utput voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 2 are configured and selected Motor set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal Direct Access Number F171 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Volts Motor 2 Torque Boost Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below 1 2 of the 2 Base Frequency setting F170 See parameter F016 Motor 1 Torque Boost for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set 2 are configured and selected Motor set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal H7 ASD Operation Manual Direct Access Number F172 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units TI F173 F176 Electronic Thermal Protection 2 Program Motor Parameters Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set 2 This value is entered as either a percentage of the
307. ve normal operation Changeable During Run Yes Communication Error Program Communication Setting Parameters Communication Error In the event of a communication error during a transmission the command that was transmitted may be cleared or held Settings Command Request Cleared Command Request Held Direct Access Number F830 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Command Request Cleared Changeable During Run Yes 1 Scan Receive Program Communication Setting Parameters Scan Receive Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F831 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Scan 0 Changeable During Run Yes 2 Scan Receive Program Communication Setting Parameters Scan Receive Settings Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter 172 Direct Access Number F832 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Scan 0 Changeable During Run Yes H7 ASD Operation Manual F833 F844 3 Scan Receive Direct Access Number F833 Program Communication Setting Parameters gt Scan Receive Parameter Type Selection List Settings Factory Default Scan 0 Contact Toshiba s Marketing Department for information on this parameter Changeable During Run Yes 4 Scan Receive Direct Access Number F834 Progr
308. ve lead lengths may adversely effect the performance of the motor Special cables are not required Lead lengths from the ASD to the motor in excess of those listed in Table may require filters to be added to the output of the ASD Table lists the suggested maximum lead lengths for the listed motor voltages Table 1 Model PWM Carrier NEMA MG 1 1998 Section IV Part 31 Frequency Compliant Motors 230 Volt All 1000 feet lt 5 kHz 600 feet 460 Volt gt 5 kHz 300 feet lt 5 kHz 200 feet 600 Volt gt 5 kHz 100 feet Note Contact Toshiba for application assistance when using lead lengths in excess of those listed Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the allowable thermal rise time of the motor insulation will reduce the life expectancy of the motor For proper operation the carrier frequency must be 2 2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque Variable Torque or the 5 Point Setting modes Startup and Test Perform the following checks before turning on the unit e L2 S and L3 T are connected to the 3 phase input power TI U T2 V and T3 W are connected to the motor e The 3 phase input voltage is within the ASD setup tolerances e There are no shorts and all grounds are secured H7 ASD Operation Manual I O and Control The ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof as well as operate within a wide range of output frequency and vo
309. wer Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 4 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 4 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0100 and is identified as Preset Speed 4 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter Direct Access Number F021 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 5 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 5 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0101 and is identified as Preset Speed 5 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further information on this parameter 56 Direct Access Number F022 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz H7 ASD Operation Manual F023 F101 Preset Speed 6 Program Pattern Run Control Preset Speeds 6 This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0110 and is identified as Preset Speed 6 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed see F018 for further informa
310. will return To prevent this condition before disconnecting the RJ45 connector ensure that the ASD is off H7 ASD Operation Manual Electronic Operator Interface The H7 Electronic Operator Interface EOI is comprised of an LCD display two LEDs a rotary encoder and eight keys These items are described below and their locations are provided in Figure 18 on pg 24 The EOI can be mounted remotely from the ASD as described in Appendix C on pg 200 The mounting dimensional requirements may also be found in Appendix C Using a screw length that exceeds the specified dimensions may cause deformation of the outer surface of the bezel as shown in Figure 33 on pg 202 and should be avoided The interface can operate up to distances of 15 feet from the ASD via the Common Serial TTL Port For distances beyond 15 feet the RS 485 port is recommended EOI Features LCD Display Displays configuration information performance data e g motor frequency bus voltage torque etc and diagnostic information LocallRemote Key Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes The LED is on when the system is in the Local Command mode The Local mode allows the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the EOI The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the Control Terminal Strip LED Keypad RS232 485 Communication Card or Pulse Input The selection may be made
311. y See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F197 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency sets the frequency to be associated with parameter F199 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves Direct Access Number F198 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 400 Units Hz Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage Program Special Control Parameters V f Five Point Setting The Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F198 Custom V f Five Point Setting 5 Frequency See F190 for additional information on custom V f curves 82 Direct Access Number F199 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units 46 H7 ASD Operation Manual F200 F200 Reference Priority Selection Direct Access Number F200 Program Fundamental Parameters Standard Mode Selection gt Parameter Type Selection List
312. y and is considered to always be in its True or connected to CC state It is often practical to assign this terminal to a function that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F110 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No F Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment F This parameter selects the functionality of the F input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F111 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No R Input Terminal Assignment Program Terminal Selection Parameters Input Terminal Assignment gt R This parameter selects the functionality of the R input terminal In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable R terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 6 on pg 67 Direct Access Number F112 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reverse
313. y be selected and run Each V f profile is comprised of 4 user settings Base Frequency Base Frequency Voltage Manual Torque Boost and Electronic Thermal Protection Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 48 Accel Decel Group 1 of 4 Accel Decel profiles may be selected and run Each of the Accel Decel profiles is comprised of 3 user settings Acceleration Deceleration and Pattern Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 48 or see F009 at the EOD Feedback in Panel Mode This feature enables or disables the PID feedback function Torque Limit Group This parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor of a multiple motor configuration The settings of profiles 1 4 may be setup at F441 F444 F446 and F448 respectively H7 ASD Operation Manual 31 32 Monitor Mode The Monitor mode allows the user to monitor motor performance variables control settings and configuration data during motor operation There are 46 items that may be monitored from this mode The items are listed and described below Note The Monitor mode is a read only mode The settings cannot be changed from the Monitor mode For information on how to change the values see the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg 26 Running Frequency
314. ype Selection List This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that Factory Default Linear controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 2 Accel Decel parameter Changeable During Run Yes Settings Linear S Pattern 1 S Pattern 2 Acc Dec Group Direct Access Number F504 No path available Direct Access Only Parameter Type Selection List While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter selects the Factory Default 1 accel decel profile to be used during a multiple accel decel profile configuration The accel decel setting for selections 1 4 may be found at Changeable During Run Yes F009 F500 F510 and F514 respectively Note If using the LCD EOI press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter Acc Dec Switching Frequency 1 Direct Access Number F505 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched Factory Default 0 00 from the Accel 1 profile to the Accel 2 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz S Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment Direct Access Number F506 Program Special Control Parameters Accel Decel Special Parameter Type Numerical Sets the lower limit of S pattern 1 and 2 Factory Default
315. ze the effectiveness of the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions Direct Access Number F403 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum Open Units Q Motor Constant 3 exciting inductance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to input the excitation inductance for the motor This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions Direct Access Number F404 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default drive dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 6500 0 Units uH Motor Constant 4 load inertia Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to control the load inertia during speed changes Acceleration and deceleration overshoot may be reduced by increasing this value This setting motor tuning is required to use the Vector Control Automatic Torque Boost or Automatic Energy saving functions Direct Access Number F405 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Motor Constant 5 leakage inductance Program Motor Parameters Vector Motor Model T

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sony Trinitron KV-EF29M61 User's Manual  Kenroy Home 32176GCH Instructions / Assembly  U212131T_ Pot Rack Rev C.pmd  DSL-N12U  JAPANESE USER MANUAL    Guide d`utilisation Soft Air®wds  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file